nissan murano car bookthe nissan green program symbol indicates environmentally friendly information...

ForewordWelcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle has been delivered to you with confidence. Your vehicle has been produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual has been prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometers (miles) of driving plea-sure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains in detail the warranty coverage that applies to your vehicle.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, your NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with their exten-sive resources.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip foryou and your passengers!

• NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for condi-tions.

• ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems.Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.

• ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea-tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUALThis manual includes information for all options available on this model. There-fore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effectat the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications ordesigns at any time without notice and without obligation.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be cov-ered under NISSAN warranties.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELYBefore driving your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This willensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you inthe safe operation of your vehicle.

Throughout this manual the following symbols and words are used:

WARNING

Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious per-sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures described must befollowed precisely.

CAUTION

Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per-sonal injury, or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures described must be followed carefully.

NOTE

Indicates additional helpful information.

The NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM symbol indicates environmentally friendlyinformation and best practices.

This symbol means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these point to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in theillustration.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING (4WD models)This vehicle will handle and manoeuvre differently from an ordinary passengervehicle, because it has a higher centre of gravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “Four-wheel drive (4WD)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

© 2008 Nissan International SA, Switzerland

Contents Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, andaudio system 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical information 9

Index 10

0 Illustrated table of contentsIllustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS).......................................................... 0-2Exterior front ............................................................ 0-3Exterior rear............................................................. 0-4Passenger compartment .......................................... 0-5Cockpit ................................................................... 0-6

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models............................ 0-6

Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models ......................... 0-7Instrument panel ...................................................... 0-8

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models............................ 0-8Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models ......................... 0-9

Meters and gauges .................................................. 0-10Engine compartment................................................ 0-11

VQ35DE engine model ....................................... 0-11

1. Rear centre seat belt (P. 1-12)

2. Head restraints (P. 1-6)

3. Seat belts (P. 1-7)

4. Rear armrest (P. 1-7)

5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags*(P. 1-23)

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-23)

7. Child restraint anchorage* (P. 1-23)

8. ISOFIX child restraint system (P. 1-22)

9. Rear seats (P. 1-4)

— Child restraints (P. 1-14)

10. Supplemental side-impact air bags (P. 1-23)

11. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P. 1-30)

12. Front seats (P. 1-2)*: where fitted

SSI0476

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Bonnet (P. 3-17)

2. Headlights and turn signal lights

— Switch operation (P. 2-18)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-21)

3. Windscreen wipers and washers


— Window washer fluid (P. 8-14)

4. Roof rack* (P. 2-34)

5. Sunroof* (P. 2-27)

6. Power windows (P. 2-25)

7. Recovery hook (P. 6-10)

8. Fog lights (P. 2-20)



9. Headlight cleaners* (P. 2-22)

10. Tyres

— Wheels and tyres (P. 8-25)

— Flat tyre (P. 6-2)

— Specifications (P. 9-4)

— Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (P. 5-13)

11. Side turn signal lights (P. 2-20)— Bulb replacement (P. 8-21)

12. Outside rearview mirrors (P. 3-23)— Side view camera* (P. 4-17)

13. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Security system (P. 3-14)

14. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

15. Fuel filler lid (P. 3-21)

*: where fitted

SSI0477

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Back door (P. 3-17)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Spare tyre (P. 6-3)

2. Rear window wiper and washer


— Window washer fluid (P. 8-14)

3. Rear window defogger (P. 2-23)

4. High-mounted stop light (Bulb replacement)(P. 8-19)

5. Antenna (P. 4-29)

6. Rear fog light



7. Rear view camera* (P. 4-13)

8. Rear combination lights (Bulb replacement)(P. 8-21)

*: where fitted

SSI0478

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Tonneau cover (P. 2-33)

2. Rear personal lights (P. 2-35)

3. Coat hooks (P. 2-32)

4. Mobile Entertainment System (MES)*

— Flip-down screen (P. 4-42)

— Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player (P. 4-42)

— DVD remote controller (P. 4-44)

— Headphones (P. 4-43)

5. Automatic drive positioner switch* (P. 3-25)

6. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P. 2-25)

— Power door lock switch (P. 3-5)

— Outside mirror remote control switch(P. 3-23)

7. Sun visors (P. 2-34)

8. Sunroof switch* (P. 2-27)

9. Map lights (P. 2-35)

10. Sunglasses holder* (P. 2-30)

11. Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-22)

12. Luggage area

— Luggage net (P. 2-33)

— Power outlet (P. 2-28)

— Spare tyre (P. 6-3)

13. Rear cup holders (P. 2-31)

14. Heated switches*(P. 1-4)

15. Console box (P. 2-30)

16. Auxiliary sockets (P. 4-41)

17. Console box (P. 2-30)

— Power outlet (P. 2-28)

— Auxiliary sockets (P. 4-41)

18. Front cup holders (P. 2-31)

19. Ashtray and cigarette lighter* (P. 2-29)/Stor-age box* (P. 2-30)

20. Cancel switch for ultrasonic and tilt sensors*(theft warning system) (P. 3-15)

*: where fitted

SSI0479

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODELS1. Power back door switch* (P. 3-19)

2. Instrument brightness control switch(P. 2-4)

3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-18)

— Turn signal (P. 2-20)

— Fog light (P. 2-20)

4. Trip computer switch (P. 2-15)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer(P. 2-2)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

7. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-17)

8. Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFFswitch* / Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch* (P. 5-16)

9. Power back door main switch* (P. 3-18)

10. Power seatback switch (P. 1-5)

11. Fuel filler lid opener switch (P. 3-21)

12. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever*(P. 3-21)

13. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheelswitch* (P. 3-22)

14. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)— Audio control steering switch (P. 4-40)

15. Steering wheel— Power steering system (P. 5-21)— Horn (P. 2-24)— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag(P. 1-23)

16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)— Cruise control main/set switch (P. 5-17)

17. Centre-console mounted controls— Heated seat switches* (P. 1-4)— Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK switch(P. 5-13)

*: where fitted

SSI0480

COCKPIT


RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODELS1. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-18)— Turn signal (P. 2-20)— Fog light (P. 2-20)

2. Steering wheel— Power steering system (P. 5-21)— Horn (P. 2-24)

— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag(P. 1-23)

3. Instrument brightness control switch (P. 2-4)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)


6. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer(P. 2-2)

7. Centre-console mounted controls— Heated seat switches (P. 1-4)— Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK switch(P. 5-13)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)— Audio control steering switch (P. 4-40)

9. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever*(P. 3-21)

10. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheelswitch* (P. 3-22)

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)— Cruise control main/set switch (P. 5-17)

12. Power back door main switch* (P. 3-18)

13. Power back door switch* (P. 3-19)

14. Power seatback switch (P. 1-5)

15. Fuel filler lid opener switch (P. 3-21)

16. Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFFswitch* / Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch* (P. 5-16)

17. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-17)

*: where fitted

NIC1467


LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODELS1. Side vents (P. 4-19)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-2)

3. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-6)

4. Centre vents (P. 4-19)

5. Centre display

— Rear and front-side view monitors*(P. 4-13)

6. Centre multi-function control panel (P. 4-2)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons(P. 4-5)

— Audio system (P. 4-30)

7. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P. 2-24)

8. Front passenger’s supplemental front-impactair bag (P. 1-23)

9. Fuse box cover (P. 8-18)

10. Parking brake

— Operation (P. 3-24)

— Check (P. 8-9)

11. Intelligent Key port

— Intelligent Key battery discharge (P. 5-8)

— Intelligent Key battery replacement(P. 8-16)

12. Audio system (P. 4-30)

— Clock (P. 3-11)

13. Selector lever (P. 5-9)

14. Power outlet (P. 2-28)

15. Ashtray and cigarette lighter (P. 2-29)/Storagebox* (P. 2-31)

16. Defogger switch (P. 2-23)

17. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-20)

18. Glove box lid release handle (P. 2-30)

*: where fitted

SSI0482

INSTRUMENT PANEL


RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODELS1. Side vents (P. 4-19)

2. Front passenger’s supplemental front-impactair bag (P. 1-23)

3. Centre vents (P. 4-19)

4. Centre multi-function control panel (P. 4-2)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons(P. 4-5)

— Audio system (P. 4-30)

5. Centre display

— Rear view monitor* (P. 4-13)

6. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P. 2-24)

7. Meters and gauges (P. 2-2)

8. Glove box lid release handle (P. 2-30)

9. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-20)

10. Defogger switch (P. 2-23)

11. Ashtrays and cigarette lighter (P. 2-29)

12. Power outlet (P. 2-28)

13. Door lock indicator light (P. 2-8)

14. Selector lever (P. 5-9)

15. Audio system (P. 4-30)

— Clock (P. 3-11)

16. Parking brake

— Operation (P. 3-24)

— Check (P. 8-9)

17. Fuse box cover (P. 8-18)

18. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-6)

19. Intelligent Key port

— Intelligent Key battery discharge (P. 5-8)

— Intelligent Key battery replacement(P. 8-16)

*: where fitted

SSI0498


1. Instrument brightness control switch (P. 2-4)

2. Tachometer (P. 2-2)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-2)

4. Fuel gauge (P. 2-3)

5. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-5)


7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display (P. 2-11)

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 2-3)

9. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip (P. 2-2)

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)position indicator (P. 2-4)

10. RESET switch for trip odometer (P. 2-2)

SSI0484

METERS AND GAUGES


VQ35DE ENGINE MODEL1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

2. Engine drive belts (P. 8-9)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-12)

6. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-17)

7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)

8. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

9. Radiator filler cap (P. 8-5)— Engine overheat (P. 6-8)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

11. Battery (P. 8-14)— Jump starting (P. 6-6)

SDI2172

ENGINE COMPARTMENT


NOTE


1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint systemSafety — seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system

Seats....................................................................... 1-2Front seats ......................................................... 1-2Rear seats .......................................................... 1-4Head restraints ................................................... 1-6Armrest .............................................................. 1-7

Seat belts ................................................................ 1-7Precautions on seat belt usage ........................... 1-7Child safety ........................................................ 1-9Pregnant women ................................................ 1-10Injured persons................................................... 1-10CENTER mark on seat belts (where fitted) .......... 1-10Three-point type seat belts.................................. 1-10

Seat belt maintenance ........................................ 1-14Child restraints ........................................................ 1-14

Precautions on child restraints usage.................. 1-14Universal child restraints for front seat and rearseats .................................................................. 1-15Installation of child restraint system ..................... 1-17

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................... 1-23Precautions on Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)..................................................... 1-23Supplemental air bag systems ............................ 1-29Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................ 1-30Repair and replacement procedure ..................... 1-31

WARNING

• Do not drive and/or ride in the vehicle withthe seatback reclined. This can be danger-ous. The shoulder belt will not be properlyagainst the body. In an accident, you and yourpassengers could be thrown into the shoul-der belt and receive neck or other seriousinjuries. You and your passengers could alsoslide under the lap belt and receive seriousinjuries.

• For the most effective protection while thevehicle is in motion, the seatback should beupright. Always sit well back in the seat andadjust the seat properly. (See “Seat belts”later in this section.)

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not tocontact any moving parts to avoid possible inju-ries and/or damages.

FRONT SEATS

WARNING

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving sothat full attention may be given to vehicle opera-tion.

Power seat adjustment

WARNING

Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone in thevehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. Theycould unknowingly activate switches or controlsand inadvertently become involved in a seriousaccident and injure themselves.

Operating tips:

• The power seat motor has an auto-reset over-load protection circuit. If the motor stops duringthe seat adjustment, wait 30 seconds, then reac-tivate the switch.

• To avoid discharge of the battery, do not operatethe power seats for a long period of time whenthe engine is not running.

For the automatic drive positioner operation (wherefitted), see “Automatic drive positioner (wherefitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.

SSS0133AZ

SEATS

1-2 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward:

Move forward or backward the adjusting switch j1to the desired position.

Reclining:

Move forward or backward the adjusting switch j2to the desired position.

The reclining feature allows the adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes to helpobtain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” laterin this section.)

The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants torest when the vehicle is parked.

WARNING

The seatback should not be reclined any morethan needed for comfort. Seat belts are mosteffective when the passenger sits well back andstraight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined,the risk of sliding under the lap belt and beinginjured is increased.

Seat lifter (where fitted):

1. Pull up or push down the adjusting switch toadjust the seat height until the desired position isachieved.

2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to adjust thefront angle of the seat until the desired position isachieved.

Lumbar support:

The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver.

Push each side of the adjusting switch to adjust theseat lumbar area until the desired position isachieved.

SSS0834Z

SSS0835Z

SSS0795AZ

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

HEATED SEATS (where fitted)The front seats can be warmed by built-in heaters.The switches located on the centre console andrear doors (where fitted for rear seats) can be oper-ated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

• For high heat, push the HI (High) side of theswitch j1 .

• For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of theswitch j2 .

• The indicator light j3 will illuminate when lowor high is selected.

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to thelevel position. Make sure the indicator light turnsoff.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automati-

cally turning the heater on and off. The indicator lightwill remain on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the switch.

CAUTION

• The battery could run down if the seat heateris operated while the engine is not running.

• Do not use the seat heater for extended peri-ods or when no one is using the seat.

• Do not put anything on the seat which insu-lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seatcover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may becomeoverheated.

• Do not place anything hard or heavy on theseat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.This may result in damage to the seat heater.

• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat shouldbe removed immediately with a dry cloth.

• When cleaning the seat, never use petrol, thin-ner, or any similar materials.

• If any malfunctions are found or the heatedseat does not operate, turn the switch off andhave the system checked by a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop.

REAR SEATS

FoldingBefore folding the rear seats:

• Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks onthe side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” later in thissection.)

• Disconnect and stow the centre seat belt andtongue into the retractor base. (See “Rear cen-tre seat belt” later in this section.)

• Always reconnect the centre seat belt when theseat is returned to the upright position.

• Remove drink containers from the rear cupholder.

To fold down the seatbacks:

Pull the strap on the rear seat jA . Pull the lever jBbeside the luggage compartment and fold the seat-back.

SIC3650Z SSS0569Z


To return the seatbacks:

Manual operation:

Lift up each seatback and push it to the upright posi-tion until it is latched.

Power operation:

Push and hold the corresponding switch located onthe lower side of the instrument panel jB or the rightor left side in the luggage compartment jA .

A beep sounds once and the seatback will be re-turned automatically.

A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fullyreturned to the seating position.

If the control unit detects any obstacle or malfunc-tions while in the power operation, a beep soundsfor 4 seconds and the seatback will return to thefolded position automatically. Check if there are anyobstacles caught that prevents seats from returningto the folded position. See a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop if the beep still sounds.

WARNING

• Never allow anyone to ride in the luggagecompartment or on the rear seat when it is inthe fold-down position. Use of these areas bypassengers without proper restraints couldresult in serious injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or strapsto help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seatbacks. Ina sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargocould cause personal injury.

• When returning the seatbacks to the uprightposition, be certain they are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they are notcompletely secured, passengers may be in-jured in an accident or sudden stop.

CAUTION

• When operating the rear power seatback re-turn, make sure that the vehicle is stoppedand the transmission is in the P (Park) posi-tion.

• Make sure the lid of the rear seat cup holdersis closed before folding the rear seatback.

RecliningPull the reclining strap jA and position the seatbackat the desired angle. Release the reclining strapafter positioning the seat at the desired angle.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seat-back for occupants of different sizes to help obtainproper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat beltusage” later in this section.) The seatback may alsobe reclined to allow occupants to rest when thevehicle is parked.

SSS0821Z SSS0227AZ


HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Do not drive and/or ride in the vehicle with thehead restraint removed. This can be dangerous.Head restraints should be adjusted properly asthey may provide significant protection againstinjury in an accident. Check the height aftersomeone else uses the seat.

The proper adjustment of the head restraint is asillustrated.

Adjust the head restraint so that the head restraint’scentre is level with the centre of the ears.

Adjustment1. Push in the lock knob j1 (where fitted for the

rear seats) and pull up the head restraint to raiseto the proper position.

2. Push in the lock knob j1 and push down thehead restraint to lower to the proper position.

Active head restraints

WARNING

• Failure to adjust the head restraint properlymay reduce the effectiveness of the activehead restraint. Always adjust the head re-straint as described earlier in this section.

• Do not attach anything to the head restraintstalks. Doing so could impair the active headrestraint function.

• Always wear seat belts. Active head restraintsare designed to supplement other safety sys-tems. No system can prevent all injuries inany accident.

The active head restraint moves forward utilising theforce that the seatback receives from the occupantin a rear-end collision. The movement of the headrestraint helps support the front occupant’s head byreducing its backward movement and helps absorbsome of the forces that may lead to whiplash typeinjuries.

Active head restraints are effective to provide pro-tection at low to medium speeds in which whiplashinjury seems to occur most.

Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraintsreturn to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-scribed in the previous section.

SSS0287Z SSS0288Z

SSS0508Z


ARMREST

RearPull the armrest forward until it becomes horizontal.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing the seat belt properly adjustedand sitting upright and well back in the seat, chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSANstrongly encourages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even if your seat-ing position includes the supplemental air bag sys-tems.SSS0229AZ

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

• Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bonystructure of the body, and should be worn lowacross the front of the pelvis or the pelvis,chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearingthe lap section of the belt across the abdomi-nal area must be avoided. Serious injury mayoccur if a seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134AZ

SSS0136AZ

SSS0014Z

SSS0016Z


• Position the lap belt as low and snug as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. A lap beltworn too high could increase the risk of inter-nal injuries in an accident.

• Do not allow more than one person to use thesame seat belt. Each belt assembly must onlybe used by one occupant; it is dangerous toput a belt around a child being carried on theoccupant’s lap.

• Never carry more people in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts.

• Never wear seat belts inside out. Belts shouldnot be worn with straps twisted. Doing so mayreduce their effectiveness.

• Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly aspossible, consistent with comfort, to providethe protection for which they have been de-signed. A slack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.

• Every person who drives or rides in this ve-hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil-dren should be properly restrained in the rearseat and, if appropriate, in a child restraintsystem.

• Do not run the belt behind your back or underyour arm. Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest. The beltshould be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Serious injurymay occur if a seat belt is not worn properly.

• No modifications or additions should be madeby the user which will either prevent the seatbelt adjusting devices from operating to re-move slack, or prevent the seat belt assemblyfrom being adjusted to remove slack.

• Care should be taken to avoid contaminationof the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi-cals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaningmay safely be carried out using mild soap andwater. The belt should be replaced if webbingbecomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

• It is essential to replace the entire assemblyafter it has been worn in a severe impact evenif damage to the assembly is not obvious.

• All seat belt assemblies including retractorsand attaching hardware should be inspectedafter any collision by a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop. NISSAN recommends that allseat belt assemblies in use during a collisionbe replaced unless the collision was minorand the belts show no damage and continueto operate properly. Seat belt assemblies notin use during a collision should also be in-spected and, when necessary, replaced if ei-ther damage or improper operation is noted.

• Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has acti-vated, it cannot be reused. It must be replacedtogether with the retractor. Contact a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

• Removal and installation of the pre-tensionerseat belt system components should be doneby a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING

• Infants and children need special protection.The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop-erly. The shoulder belt may come too close tothe face or neck. The lap belt may not fit overtheir small hipbones. In an accident, an im-properly fitted seat belt could cause seriousor fatal injury.

• Always use an appropriate child restraint sys-tem.

Children need adults to help protect them. Theyneed to be properly restrained. The proper restraintdepends on the child’s size.

Infants and small childrenNISSAN recommends that infants and small chil-dren be seated in a child restraint system. Youshould choose a child restraint system that fits your

SSS0099Z


vehicle and the child, and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Large children

WARNING

• Never allow children to stand or kneel on anyseats.

• Never allow children in the luggage areaswhile the vehicle is moving. A child could beseriously injured in an accident or suddenstop.

Children who are too large for a child restraint sys-tem should be seated and restrained by the seatbelts that are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulder belt thatfits close to the face or neck, the use of a boosterseat (commercially available) may help overcomethis. The booster seat should raise the child so thatthe shoulder belt is properly positioned across thetop, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap beltis low on the hips. The booster seat should also fitthe vehicle seat. Once the child has grown so thatthe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face orneck of the child, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat. In addition, there are many types ofchild restraint systems available for larger childrenthat should be used for maximum protection.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, andalways position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest. Neverrun the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area.Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons use seatbelts. Contact your doctor for specific recommen-dations.

CENTER MARK ON SEAT BELTS(where fitted)

Selecting correct set of seat beltsThe centre seat belt buckle is identified by the CEN-TER mark. The centre seat belt tongue can be fas-tened only into the centre seat belt buckle.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS

Fastening seat belts

WARNING

The seatback should not be in a reclined positionany more than needed for comfort. Seat belts aremost effective when the passenger sits well backand straight up in the seat.

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in this sec-tion.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor andinsert the tongue into the buckle until you hearand feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during a sud-den stop or on impact. A slow pulling motionpermits the seat belt to move, and allows yousome freedom of movement in the seat.

SSS0671Z

SSS0292Z


3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on thehips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retrac-tor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is routed over your shoulder and is snugacross your chest.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

WARNING

• The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. Failureto do so may reduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an accident.

• The shoulder belt should rest on the middleof the shoulder. It must not rest against theneck.

• Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in anyway.

• Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is se-cured by trying to move the shoulder belt an-chor up and down after adjustment.

To adjust, pull the release button j1 and move theshoulder belt anchor j2 to the proper position, sothat the belt passes over the centre of the shoulder.The belt should be away from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder. Release the buttonto lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

Unfastening seat beltsPush the button on the buckle. The seat belt auto-matically retracts.

Seat belt hooksWhen the rear seat belts are not in use and whenfolding down the rear seats, hook the rear outer seatbelts on the seat belt hooks.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement:

• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

• When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, checkthe operation by grasping the shoulder belt and pull-ing forward quickly. The retractor should lock and

SSS0467Z

SSS0351AZ

SSS0845Z


restrict further belt movement. If the retractor doesnot lock during this check, contact a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop immediately.

Rear centre seat beltThe rear centre seat belt has a connector tongue j1and a seat belt tongue j2 . Both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue must be securelylatched for proper seat belt operation.

WARNING

• Always fasten the connector tongue and theseat belt in the order shown.

• Always make sure both the connector tongueand the seat belt tongue are secured whenusing the seat belt. Do not use it with only theseat belt tongue attached. This could result inserious personal injury in case of an accidentor a sudden stop.

Stowing rear centre seat belt:

When folding down the rear seat, the rear centreseat belt can be retracted into a stowed position.

1. Hold the connector tongue j1 so that the seatbelt does not retract suddenly when the tongueis released from the connector buckle. Releasethe connector tongue by inserting a suitable toolsuch as key jA into the connector buckle.

SSS0391Z

SSS0241Z

SSS0921Z


2. Store the seat belt tongue into the retractor basefirst j2 .

3. Store the connector tongue into the retractorbase j3 .

WARNING

• Do not unfasten the rear centre seat belt con-nector except when folding down the rearseat.

• When attaching the rear centre seat belt con-nector, be certain that the seatbacks are com-pletely secured in the latched position andthe rear centre seat belt connector is com-pletely secured.

• If the rear centre seat belt connector and theseatbacks are not secured in the correct posi-tion, serious personal injury may result in anaccident or sudden stop.

Attaching rear centre seat belt:

Always be sure the rear centre seat belt connectortongue and connector buckle are attached. Discon-nect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

1. Pull out the connector tongue from the retractorbase j1 .

2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the retractorbase j2 .

3. Pull the seat belt and fasten the connector buckleuntil it clicks j3 .

The centre seat belt connector tongue and buckleare identified by the and mark.

The centre seat belt connector tongue can be at-tached only into the rear centre seat belt connectorbuckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening seat belts”earlier in this section.

WARNING

When attaching the rear centre seat belt connec-tor, be certain that the seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position and the rear cen-tre seat belt connector is completely secured.

SSS0922Z

SSS0235Z


Storing rear seat belt bucklesBefore folding down the seat, put the buckles in thestorage of the seat cushion to avoid dropping themunder the seat cushion.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCEPeriodically check that the seat belt and all the metalcomponents, such as buckles, tongues, retractors,flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If looseparts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on theseat belt webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seatbelt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipethe shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soapsolution or any solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth andallow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allowthe seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS USAGE

WARNING

• Infants and small children should never becarried on your lap. It is not possible for eventhe strongest adult to resist the forces of asevere accident. The child could be crushedbetween the adult and parts of the vehicle.Also, it is dangerous to put a seat belt arounda child being carried on the occupant’s lap.

• Infants and children need special protection.The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop-erly. The shoulder belt may come too close tothe face or neck. The lap belt may not fit overtheir small hip bones. In an accident, an im-properly fitting seat belt could cause seriousor fatal injury.

• Infants and small children should always beplaced in an appropriate child restraint sys-

tem while riding in the vehicle. Failure to usea child restraint system can result in seriousinjury or death.

• Child restraint systems specially designed forinfants and small children are available fromseveral manufacturers. When selecting anychild restraint systems, place your child in thechild restraint system and check the variousadjustments to be sure that the child restraintsystem is compatible with your child. Alwaysfollow the manufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.

• NISSAN recommends that the child restraintsystem be installed in the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatrather than in the front seat.

• Follow all of the child restraint system manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.When purchasing a child restraint system, besure to select one which will fit your child andvehicle. It may not be possible to properly in-stall some types of child restraint systems inyour vehicle.

• For a front-facing child restraint system,check to make sure the shoulder belt doesnot fit close to child’s face or neck. If it does,put the shoulder belt behind the child restraintsystem. If you must install a front-facing childrestraint system in the front seat, see “Instal-lation of child restraint system” later in thissection.

SSS0099Z

CHILD RESTRAINTS


• Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-tem in the front seat. An inflating supplemen-tal front-impact air bag could seriously injureor kill your child. A rear-facing child restraintsystem must only be used in the rear seat.

• Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned tofit a child restraint system, but as upright aspossible.

• If the seat belt in the position where a childrestraint system is installed requires a lockingclip and if it is not used, injuries could resultfrom a child restraint system tipping over dur-ing normal vehicle braking or cornering.

• After attaching a child restraint system, test itbefore you place the child in it. Tilt it from sideto side. Try to tug it forward and check if it isheld securely in place. The child restraint sys-tem should not move more than 25 mm (1 in).If the restraint is not secure, tighten the beltas necessary, or install the restraint in anotherseat and test it again.

• Check the child restraint system in your ve-hicle to be sure that it is compatible with thevehicle’s seat belt system.

• If a child restraint system is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being injured in acollision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

• Improper use of a child restraint system canincrease the risk or severity of injury for boththe child and other occupants in the vehicle.

• Always use an appropriate child restraint sys-tem. An improperly installed child restraintsystem could lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

• When the child restraint system is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent itfrom being thrown around in case of a suddenstop or accident.

NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil-dren be seated in a child restraint system. Youshould choose a child restraint system that fits yourvehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for installation and use. In addition, thereare many types of child restraint systems availablefor larger children that should be used for maximumprotection.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint system left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Check theseating surface and buckles before placing yourchild in a child restraint system.

UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINTS FORFRONT SEAT AND REAR SEATSWhen selecting any child restraint, keep the follow-ing points in mind:

• Choose a child restraint that complies with thelatest European safety standard, ECE Regula-tion 44.03.

• Place your child in the child restraint and checkthe various adjustments to be sure the child re-

straint is compatible with your child. Always fol-low all of the recommended procedures.

• Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with vehicle’s seat belt sys-tem.

• Refer to the tables later in this section for a list ofthe recommended fitment positions and the ap-proved child restraints for your vehicle.


Approved child restraint positions

Age group Seating positionFront passenger seat Rear centre seats Rear outer seat

< 10 kg (0 to 9 months) X X I< 13 kg (0 to 24 months) X X I< 9 to 18 kg (9 to 48 months) UF L L or I< 15 to 36 kg (4 to 12 years) UF X X

I: Suitable for the “ISOFIX” category given in the following table.

L: Suitable for particular child restraints given in the following table.These restraints may be of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted”, “semi-universal” or “universal” categories.

UF: Suitable for the “Universal” category - forward facing child restraints - approved for use in this age group.

X: Seat position not suitable for children in this age group.


List of approved ISOFIX and specific Universal child restraintsWARNING

In vehicles equipped with a side air bag system,do not let any infants or small children sit in thefront passenger’s seat as the air bag may causeserious injury in case of deployment during a col-lision.

NOTE

Universal child restraints approved to ECE Regu-lation NO. 44.03 are clearly marked “Universal”.

INSTALLATION OF CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEM

Installation on rear seats - seat belts withautomatic locking mode

WARNING

• Failure to use the seat belts will result in thechild restraint system not being properly se-cured. It could tip over or otherwise be unse-cured and cause injury to the child in a sud-den stop or collision.

• The direction of the child restraint system de-pends on the type of the child restraint sys-tem and the size of the child.

Age group Seating positionFront passenger seat Rear centre seats Rear outer seats

< 10 kg (0 to 9 months) X X Fair G 0/1 *2*4< 13 kg (0 to 24 months) X X Fair G 0/1 *2*4< 9 to 18 kg (9 to 48 months) — Romer Dio Plus *1*3

Fair G0/1 *1*3Romer Dio Plus *1*3

Fair G0/1 *1*4< 15 to 36 kg (4 to 12 years) — X X

*1: Forward facing only.

*2: Rearward facing only.

*3: Universal mode only.

*4: This is an ISOFIX child restraint. It requires an additional platform to be fitted to your vehicle:Rearward facing use Platform RWFAForward facing use Platform FWFD


Front-facing:

When you install a front-facing child restraint systemin the rear seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the front-facing child restraint system onthe rear seat.

Always follow the child restraint system manu-facturer’s instructions for installation.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-straint system and insert it into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint system manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull out the shoulder belt until the entire belt isextended to change the locking mode to auto-matic locking.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up jA on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Test the child restraint system before you placethe child in it. Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check if it is held securely in place.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic lock-ing mode by trying to pull more of the seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull any morebelt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor isin the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint sys-tem is properly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint system is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the automatic lockingmode is cancelled and returned to the emergencylocking mode.

SSS0312Z

SSS0493Z

SSS0494Z

SSS0423AZ

SSS0392AZ


Rear-facing:

When you install a rear-facing child restraint systemin the rear seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the rear-facing child restraint system onthe rear seat.

Always follow the child restraint system manu-facturer’s instructions for installation.



3. Pull out the shoulder belt until the entire belt isextended to change the locking mode to auto-matic locking.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up jA on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.


6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic lock-

ing mode by trying to pull more of the seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull any morebelt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor isin the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint sys-tem is properly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint system is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the automatic lockingmode is cancelled and returned to the emergencylocking mode.

Installation on rear seats - seat beltswithout automatic locking mode

WARNING

• The three-point type seat belt on your vehicleis not equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor.

• The direction of the child restraint system de-pends on the type of the child restraint sys-tem and the size of the child.

SSS0335AZ

SSS0258CZ

SSS0259CZ


Front-facing:

If you must install a front-facing child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the front-facing child restraint system onthe rear seat.

Always follow the child restraint system manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.


To prevent slack in the lap belt, it is necessary tosecure the shoulder belt in place with a locking clipjA . Use the locking clip attached to the child re-straint system or one which is equivalent in dimen-sion and strength.



4. Make sure that the child restraint system is prop-erly secured prior to each use.

Rear-facing:

If you must install a rear-facing child restraint systemon the rear seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the rear-facing child restraint system onthe rear seat.



SSS0374AZ SSS0513Z SSS0375AZ


To prevent slack in the lap belt, it is necessary tosecure the shoulder belt in place with a locking clipjA . Use the locking clip attached to the child re-straint system or one which is equivalent in dimen-sion and strength.




Installation on front seat - seat beltswithout automatic locking mode

WARNING

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-tem on the front seat. Inflating supplementalfront-impact air bags inflate with great force.A rear-facing child restraint system could bestruck by the supplemental front-impact airbags in an accident and could seriously injureor kill your child.

• NISSAN recommends that a child restraintsystem be installed on the rear seat. How-ever, if you must install a front-facing childrestraint system on the front passenger’sseat, move the passenger’s seat to the rear-most position.

• Never install a child restraint system with atop tether strap on the front seat.

• Child restraint systems for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction and there-fore must not be used on the front seat.

Front-facing:

If you must install a front-facing child restraint sys-tem on the front seat, follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rearmost position j1 .

2. Adjust the head restraint to its highest positionj2 .

SSS0513Z SSS0300AZ

SSS0627Z


3. Position the front-facing child restraint system inthe front passenger’s seat. It should be placed inthe front-facing direction only.



5. To prevent slack in the lap belt, it is necessary to

secure the shoulder belt in place with a lockingclip jA . Use the locking clip attached to the childrestraint system, or one which is equivalent indimensions and strength.


6. Slide the seat forward so that the seat belt fullytightens the child restraint system.



ISOFIX child restraint system(where fitted)Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a childrestraint system on the rear outer seats. Two ISOFIXanchoring points (located between the seat cushionand the seatback) are mounted directly on the bodyof the vehicle ensuring secure and stable attach-ment of the child restraint system.

Be sure to correctly install ISOFIX system compat-

SSS0515Z

SSS0513Z

Locking clip

SSS0419BZ

SSS0637Z


ible child restraints in your vehicle. Otherwise, yourchild restraints may not meet the Safety Standardand may not supply proper restraint.

When installing the child restraint system, carefullyread and follow the manufacturer’s instructions sup-plied with the child restraint system.

WARNING

• An improperly installed child restraint systemcould lead to serious injury or death in a col-lision or a sudden stop.

• Inspect the anchors by inserting your fingersinto the anchor area and feeling to make surethere are no obstructions over the ISOFIX sys-tem anchors, such as seat belt webbing orseat cushion material. The child restraint sys-tem will not be secured properly if the ISOFIXsystem anchors are obstructed.

• Make sure that the child restraint system isproperly secured prior to each use.

Child restraint anchorage (where fitted)Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a childrestraint system on the rear seat. When installing achild restraint system, carefully read and follow theinstructions in this manual and those supplied withthe child restraint system.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-stand only those loads imposed by correctly fit-ted child restraints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses orfor attaching other items or equipment to thevehicle.

Anchorage location:

Anchor points are located on the back of each seat-back for all three seating positions of the rear seatas shown.

Position the top tether strap over the top of the seat-back and secure it to the tether anchorage that pro-vides the straightest installation. Tighten the tetherstrap according to the manufacturer’s instruction toremove any slack.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sectioncontains important information concerning the driv-er’s and passenger’s supplemental front-impact airbags, supplemental side-impact air bags, supple-mental curtain side-impact air bags, and pre-ten-sioner seat belts.

Supplemental front-impact air bagsystemThis system can help cushion the impact force tothe head and chest area of the driver and/or frontpassenger in certain frontal collisions. The supple-mental front-impact air bag is designed to inflate onthe front where the vehicle is impacted.

Supplemental side-impact air bagsystemThis system can help cushion the impact force tothe chest area of the driver and front passenger incertain side-impact collisions. The supplementalside-impact air bag is designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact airbag system (where fitted)This system can help cushion the impact force tothe head of the driver and passengers in front andrear outboard seating positions in certain side-im-pact collisions. The supplemental curtain side-im-pact air bag is designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

SSS0822Z

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS)


The SRS is designed to supplement the accidentprotection provided by the driver’s and passenger’sseat belts and is not designed to substitute forthem. The SRS can help save lives and reduce seri-ous injuries. However, inflating air bags may causeabrasions or other injuries. Air bags do not provideprotection to the lower body. Seat belts should al-ways be correctly worn and the occupants shouldalways be seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers.(See “Seat belts” earlier in this section.) The airbags inflate quickly in order to help protect the oc-cupants. The force of the air bags inflating can in-crease the risk of injury if the occupants are tooclose to, or are against, the air bag modules duringinflation.

The front, side and curtain side-impact air bags willdeflate quickly after deployment. The curtain side-impact air bag (where fitted) will remain inflated fora while.

The SRS operates only when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,the SRS air bag warning light illuminates forabout 7 seconds and then turns off. This indi-cates that the SRS is operational. (See “Warn-ing/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

WARNING

• The supplemental front air bags ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity frontal col-lision. Always wear your seat belts to help re-duce the risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

• The seat belts and the supplemental front-im-pact air bags are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in the seat. Thefront-impact air bags inflate with great force.If you and your passengers are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways, or out ofposition in any way, you and your passengersare at greater risk of injury or death in an acci-dent. You and your passengers may also re-ceive serious or fatal injuries from the supple-

SSS0131AZ

SSS0132AZ


mental front-impact air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far away as prac-tical from the steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Always use the seat belts.

• Keep hands on the outside of the steeringwheel. Placing them inside the steering wheelrim could increase the risk of injury if thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0006Z

SSS0007Z

SSS0008Z

SSS0009Z


WARNING

• Never let children ride unrestrained or extendtheir hands or face out of the window. Do notattempt to hold them in your lap or arms.Some examples of dangerous riding positionsare shown in the illustrations.

• Children may be severely injured or killedwhen the air bags inflate if they are not prop-erly restrained.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-tem in the front seat. An inflating supplemen-tal front-impact air bag could seriously injureor kill your child. (See “Child restraints” ear-lier in this section.)

SSS0099Z

SSS0100Z

SSS0059AZ

SSS0140Z


WARNING

• The supplemental side-impact air bags andsupplemental curtain side-impact air bags or-dinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontimpact, rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-ity side collision. Always wear the seat beltsto help reduce the risk or severity of injury inaccidents.

• The seat belts and the supplemental side-im-pact air bags and supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when youare sitting well back and upright in the seat.The supplemental side-impact air bags andsupplemental curtain side-impact air bags in-flate with great force. If you and your passen-gers are unrestrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways, or out of position in any way, youand your passengers are at greater risk ofinjury or death in an accident.

• Do not allow anyone to place their hands, legsor face near the supplemental side-impact airbags and supplemental curtain side-impactair bags located on the sides of the seatbackof the front seats or near the side roof rails.

• Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seatsor rear outboard seats to extend their handsout of the windows or lean against the doors.Some examples of dangerous riding positionsare shown in the illustrations.

• When sitting in the rear seats, do not holdonto the seatback of the front seats. If thesupplemental side-impact air bags andsupplemental curtain side-impact air bags in-flate, you may be seriously injured. Be espe-cially careful with children, who should alwaysbe properly restrained.

• Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks.They may interfere with the supplementalside-impact air bag inflations.

Pre-tensioner seat belt systemThe pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in con-junction with the supplemental front-impact air bag.Working with the front seat belt retractors and an-chors, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant thevehicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. (See“Pre-tensioner seat belt system” later in this sec-tion.)

Air bag warning labelsWarning labels about the supplemental front-impactair bag system and supplemental side-impact airbag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in theillustration.

SRS air bag:

The warning label j1 is located on the surface ofthe sun visor (front passenger’s and/or driver’s).

SSS0159Z

SSS0162Z

SSS0779Z


SRS front-impact passenger air bag:

The warning label j2 is located on the side of thepassenger’s side instrument panel. This label warnsyou not to fit a rear-facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat as such a restraint systemused in this position could cause serious injury tothe infant in case of air bag deployment during a col-lision.

In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passengerair bag system, use a rear-facing child restraint sys-tem only on the rear seats.

“Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front ofit!”

When installing a child restraint system in your ve-hicle, always follow the child restraint system manu-facturer’s instructions for installation.

For additional information, see “Child restraints”earlier in this section.

SRS side-impact, curtain side-impact air bag:

The warning label j3 is located on the side of thepassenger’s side centre pillar.

SRS air bag warning lightThe SRS air bag warning light, displaying inthe instrument panel, monitors the circuits of thesupplemental front-impact air bag, supplementalside-impact air bag, supplemental curtain side-im-pact air bag, and pre-tensioner seat belt systems.The circuits monitored by the SRS air bag warninglight are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sen-sor, satellite sensors, front-impact air bag modules,side-impact air bag modules, curtain side-impact airbag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all re-lated wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theSRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7seconds and then turns off. This indicates that theSRS air bag systems are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the air bagand/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servic-ing:

• The SRS air bag warning light remains on afterapproximately 7 seconds.

• The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-tently.

• The SRS air bag warning light does not illumi-nate at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag and/or pre-ten-sioner seat belt systems may not operate properly.They must be checked and repaired. Contact aNISSAN dealer immediately.

SPA1097Z


1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front air bag modules

3. Supplemental side air bag modules

4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags

5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagmodules

6. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

7. Satellite sensors

8. Diagnosis sensor unit

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on the steering wheelpad, on the instrument panel, and near thefront door finishers and the front seats. Donot place any objects between any occupantsand the steering wheel pad, on the instru-ment panel, and near the front door finishersand the front seats. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injury if asupplemental air bag inflates.

• Immediately after inflation, several supple-mental air bag system components will be hot.Do not touch them: you may severely burnyourself.

• No unauthorised changes should be made toany components or wiring of the supplemen-tal air bag systems. This is to prevent acci-dental inflation of the supplemental air bagsor damage to the supplemental air bag sys-tems.

• Do not make unauthorised changes to yourvehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-tem, front end structure, and side panels. Thiscould affect proper operation of the supple-mental air bag systems.

• Tampering with the supplemental air bag sys-tems may result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to the steeringwheel and the instrument panel by placingmaterials over the steering wheel pad and

SSS0919


above, around or on the instrument panel orby installing additional trim materials aroundthe supplemental air bag systems.

• Modifying or tampering with the front passen-ger seat may result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the front seats byplacing material on the seat cushion or byinstalling additional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that is not specifically de-signed to assure proper air bag operation.

• Work on and around the supplemental air bagsystems should be done by a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop. The SRS wiring shouldnot be modified or disconnected. Unautho-rised electrical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on the supple-mental air bag systems.

• The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-low and/or orange for easy identification.

When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may beheard, followed by the release of smoke. This smokeis not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Careshould be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irri-tation and choking. Those with a history of a breath-ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front-impact air bagsystemThe driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag islocated at the centre of the steering wheel. The pas-senger’s supplemental front-impact air bag is lo-cated at the instrument panel above the glove box.

The supplemental front-impact air bag system is de-signed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,although it may inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higher severity fron-tal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal colli-sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front-impact airbag system operation.

Supplemental side-impact air bagsystemThe supplemental side-impact air bag is located atthe outside of the front seats’ seatbacks.

The supplemental side-impact air bag system is de-signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions,although it may inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higher severity sideimpact. It may not inflate in certain side collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-cation of proper supplemental side-impact air bagsystem operation.

Supplemental curtain side-impact airbag systemThe supplemental curtain side-impact air bag is lo-cated at the roof rails.

The supplemental curtain side-impact air bag sys-tem is designed to inflate in higher severity side col-lisions, although it may inflate if the forces in anothertype of collision are similar to those of a higher se-verity side impact. It may not inflate in certain sidecollisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-ways an indication of proper supplemental curtainside-impact air bag system operation.

PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELTSYSTEM

WARNING

• The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reusedafter activation. It must be replaced togetherwith the retractor and buckle as a unit.

• If the vehicle becomes involved in a collisionbut the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sureto have the pre-tensioner system checkedand, if necessary, replaced by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

• No unauthorised changes should be made toany components or wiring of the pre-tensionerseat belt system. This is to prevent accidentalactivation of the pre-tensioner seat belt ordamage to the pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem.

SSS0848Z


• Work around or on the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be done by a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop. The SRS wiring shouldnot be modified or disconnected. Unautho-rised electrical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on the pre-ten-sioner seat belt system.

• If you need to dispose of the pre-tensionerseat belt system, or scrap the vehicle, contacta NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Cor-rect pre-tensioner disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The pre-tensioner system activates in conjunctionwith the front-impact air bag system. Working withthe seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat beltwhen the vehicle becomes involved in certain typesof collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the front seatbelt’s retractor and anchor. These seat belts areused the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, a fairlyloud noise may be heard, followed by the release ofsmoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi-cate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, asit may cause irritation and choking. Those with a his-tory of a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

WARNING

• Once the supplemental front-impact air bags,supplemental side-impact air bags or supple-mental curtain side-impact air bags have beeninflated, the air bag modules will not functionand must be replaced. The air bag modulesmust be replaced by a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop. The inflated air bag modulescannot be repaired.

• The air bag systems should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if thereis any damage to the front end or side portionof the vehicle.

• If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop. Correct disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The supplemental front-impact air bags, supplemen-tal side-impact air bags, supplemental curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts aredesigned to activate on a one-time-only basis. As areminder, unless the SRS air bag warning light isdamaged, the SRS air bag warning light remainsilluminated after inflation has occurred. The repairand replacement of the SRS should be done only bya NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle,information about the air bags, pre-tensioner seatbelts and related parts should be pointed out to theperson performing the maintenance. The ignitionswitch should always be in the LOCK position whenworking under the bonnet or inside the vehicle.


2 Instruments and controlsInstruments and controls

Meters and gauges .................................................. 2-2Speedometer and odometer ............................... 2-2Tachometer ........................................................ 2-2Engine coolant temperature gauge...................... 2-3Fuel gauge ......................................................... 2-3Instrument brightness control.............................. 2-4Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)position indicator ................................................ 2-4

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ........ 2-5Checking bulbs .................................................. 2-5Warning lights .................................................... 2-5Indicator lights .................................................... 2-8Audible reminders............................................... 2-10

DOT matrix liquid crystal display .............................. 2-11Indicators for operation ....................................... 2-12Maintenance indicators ....................................... 2-14Trip computer ..................................................... 2-15

Headlight and turn signal switch............................... 2-18Xenon headlights (where fitted)........................... 2-18Headlight switch ................................................. 2-18Battery saver system........................................... 2-19Headlight aiming control ..................................... 2-20Turn signal switch............................................... 2-20

Fog light switch ....................................................... 2-20Front fog lights ................................................... 2-20Rear fog light (where fitted)................................. 2-20

Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-21Windscreen wiper and washer switch................. 2-21Rain-sensing auto wiper system.......................... 2-22Rear window wiper and washer operation........... 2-23

Defogger switch ...................................................... 2-23Hazard indicator flasher switch ................................ 2-24Horn........................................................................ 2-24Windows ................................................................. 2-25

Power windows.................................................. 2-25Sunroof (where fitted) .............................................. 2-27

Automatic sunroof and sunshade ........................ 2-27Power outlet ............................................................ 2-28Ashtrays and cigarette lighter (where fitted).............. 2-29

Ashtray............................................................... 2-29Cigarette lighter.................................................. 2-29

Storage ................................................................... 2-30Glove box ........................................................... 2-30Console box ....................................................... 2-30Sunglasses holder (where fitted)......................... 2-30Storage box (where fitted) .................................. 2-31Cup holders ....................................................... 2-31Luggage floor box (where fitted) ......................... 2-31Luggage hooks................................................... 2-32Coat hooks......................................................... 2-32Luggage side box ............................................... 2-32Tonneau cover.................................................... 2-33Luggage net ....................................................... 2-33Roof rack (where fitted) ...................................... 2-34

Sun visors ............................................................... 2-34Interior lights............................................................ 2-35

Map lights........................................................... 2-35Rear personal lights ............................................ 2-35Interior light control switch .................................. 2-35Vanity mirror lights .............................................. 2-36

Luggage compartment light ................................ 2-36Battery saver system........................................... 2-36

NOTE

For an overview of the instruments and con-trols see “Meters and gauges” in the “0. Illus-trated table of contents” section.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed onthe liquid crystal display when the ignition switch isin the ON position.

The odometer j1 displays the total distance thevehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer j2 displays the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing twin trip odometer display:

Push the TRIP RESET switch j3 on the right sideof the combination meter panel to change the dis-play as follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting twin trip odometer:

Push the TRIP RESET switch j3 for more than 1second to reset the trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates the engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone j1 .

SIC3571Z

SIC3898Z

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

SIC3573Z

METERS AND GAUGES

2-2 Instruments and controls

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGEThe engine coolant temperature gauge indicates theengine coolant temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is normal when thegauge needle points within the zone j1 shown inthe illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will vary with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

• If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature near the “hot” (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decrease tem-perature.

• If the gauge is over the normal range, stopthe vehicle as soon as safely possible.

• If the engine is overheated, continued opera-tion of the vehicle may seriously damage theengine. (See “Engine overheat” in the “6. Incase of emergency” section for immediate ac-tion required.)

FUEL GAUGEThe fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank when the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turn-ing, accelerating, or going up and down hills due tomovement of fuel in the tank.

The low fuel warning appears on the dot matrix

SIC3899Z

Type A

SIC3574

Type B

SIC3900Z

Type A

SIC3575

Type B

Instruments and controls 2-3

liquid crystal display when the fuel level in the tankis getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,preferably before the gauge reads the empty (E)position.

The arrow, , indicates that the fuel filler lid islocated on the left side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Refuel before the gauge reads the empty (E) po-sition.

There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank when thefuel gauge reads the empty (E) position.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control switch can be op-erated when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

Pushing the control switch jA once will change thebrightness to the night mode.

Pushing the control switch jB once will change thebrightness to the day mode.

To adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights,push the control switches. Pushing the upper switchjA will brighten the lights. When the brightnessreaches the maximum level, a beep will sound. Thelower switch jB dims the lights.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) POSITIONINDICATORThe Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-sition indicator indicates the selector lever positionwhen the ignition switch is in the ON position. (See“Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indica-tor light ” later in this section and “Driving with Con-tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC3585Z


Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-ing light

Seat belt warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Brake warning lightSupplemental Restraint System (SRS)air bag warning light

Rear fog light indicator light*

Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Slip indicator light

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) indicator light

Door lock indicator light* Small light indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning lightElectronic Stability Programme (ESP)off indicator light*

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning lightFour-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indica-tor light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) offindicator light*

Intelligent Key warning light Front fog light indicator light *: where fitted

Master warning light High beam indicator light

CHECKING BULBSWith all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fas-ten the seat belts and push the ignition switch to theON position without starting the engine. Where fit-ted, the following lights will illuminate: , ,

, , ,

Where fitted, the following lights will illuminate brieflyand then turn off: , , , or ,

If any lights fail to illuminate, it may indicate a burned-

out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system.Have the system checked, and if necessary re-paired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshoppromptly.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed onthe dot matrix liquid crystal display on the speedom-eter. (See “DOT matrix liquid crystal display” later inthis section.)

WARNING LIGHTS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theAnti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi-nates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS isoperational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engineis running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS


is not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock functionis turned off. The brake system then operates nor-mally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See “Brakesystem” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Brake warning light

WARNING

• If the brake fluid level is below the minimummark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drivethe vehicle until the brake system has beenchecked by a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

• Even if you judge it to be safe, have your ve-hicle towed because driving it could be dan-gerous.

• Depressing the brake pedal without the en-gine running and/or with a low brake fluidlevel could increase the stopping distance andrequire greater pedal travel distance and ef-fort.

The brake warning light indicates the parking brakesystem operation, low brake fluid level of the brakesystem and Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) mal-function.

Parking brake warning indicator:

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON posi-tion with the parking brake applied, the brake warn-ing light illuminates. When the parking brake is re-leased, the brake warning light turns off.

If the parking brake is not fully released, the brakewarning light remains on. Be sure that the brakewarning light has turned off before driving. (See“Parking brake” in the “3. Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.)

Low brake fluid warning indicator:

If the brake warning light illuminates while the en-gine is running, or while driving, and the parkingbrake is released, it may indicate that the brake fluidlevel is low.

When the brake warning light illuminates while driv-ing, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Stop the engine and check the brake fluid level. Ifthe brake fluid level is at the minimum mark, addbrake fluid as necessary. (See “Brake fluid” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

If the brake fluid level is sufficient, have the brakesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop promptly.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator:

When the parking brake is released and the brakefluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning lightand the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warninglight illuminate, it may indicate that the ABS is notfunctioning properly. Have the brake system

checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop promptly. (See “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” earlier inthis section.)

Charge warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, thecharge warning light illuminates. After starting theengine, the charge warning light turns off. This indi-cates that the charging system is operational.

If the charge warning light illuminates while the en-gine is running, or while driving, it may indicate thatthe charging system is not functioning properly andmay need servicing.

When the charge warning light illuminates while driv-ing, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Stop the engine and check the alternator belt. If thealternator belt is loose, broken or missing, the charg-ing system needs repair. (See “Drive belts” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

If the alternator belt appears to be functioning cor-rectly but the charge warning light remains illumi-nated, have the charging system checked by aNISSAN dealer promptly.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator belt isloose, broken or missing.


Engine oil pressure warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theengine oil pressure warning light illuminates. Afterstarting the engine, the engine oil pressure warninglight turns off. This indicates that the oil pressuresensors in the engine are operational.

If the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates orblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethat the engine oil pressure is low.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Stopthe engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop.

CAUTION

• Running the engine with the engine oil pres-sure warning light illuminated could cause se-rious damage to the engine.

• The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. The oillevel should be checked using the dipstick.(See “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.)

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theFour-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light illuminates.After starting the engine, the 4WD warning lightturns off. This indicates that the 4WD system isoperational.

If the 4WD system malfunctions or the revolution or

radius of the front and the rear wheel differs, thewarning light will either remain illuminated or blink.(See “Four-wheel drive (4WD)” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.)

CAUTION

• If the 4WD warning light comes on while driv-ing there may be a malfunction in the 4WDsystem. Reduce the vehicle speed and haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop as soon as possible.

• If the 4WD warning light blinks when you aredriving:

– Blinks rapidly (about twice a second):Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle theengine. The driving mode will change to2WD to prevent the 4WD system from mal-functioning.If the warning light turns off, you can driveagain.

– Blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec-onds):Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle theengine. Check that all tyre sizes are thesame, tyre pressure is correct and tyresare not worn.

If the warning light is still on after the above op-erations, have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop as soon as pos-sible.

Intelligent Key warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theIntelligent Key warning light illuminates and thenturns off. This indicates that the steering lock andthe Intelligent Key warning systems are operational.

This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in thesteering lock system or the Intelligent Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, itmay be impossible to free the steering lock or tostart the engine. If the light comes on while theengine is running, you can drive the vehicle. How-ever in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop for repair as soon as possible.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, themaster warning light illuminates if any of the follow-ing are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal dis-play.

• NO KEY warning

• Low fuel warning

• Low washer fluid warning

• Parking brake release warning

• Door/back door open warning

(See “DOT matrix liquid crystal display” later in thissection.)


Seat belt warning light

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theseat belt warning light illuminates. The light will con-tinue to illuminate until the driver’s seat belt is fas-tened.

For precautions on seat belt usage, see “Seat belts”in the “1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) air bag warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This indicates that the SRS air bag systemis operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS airbag system and pre-tensioner seat belt need servic-ing. Have the system checked, and if necessaryrepaired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshoppromptly.

• The SRS air bag warning light remains illumi-nated after about 7 seconds.

• The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-tently.

• The SRS air bag warning light does not come onat all.

Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag sys-

tem and pre-tensioner seat belt may not functionproperly. (See “Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)” in the “1. Safety — seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section.)

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Cruise indicator light

The cruise indicator light indicates the activation ofthe cruise control system.

Cruise main switch indicator:

When the cruise control main switch is turned on,the indicator light will illuminate, indicating the cruisecontrol system is in the standby mode. (See “Cruisecontrol” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Cruise malfunction:

If the cruise indicator light blinks while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the cruise control system isnot functioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. (See“Cruise control” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-tion.)

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) indicatorlight

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theContinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indicatorlight illuminates and then turns off.

Door lock indicator light (ForRight-Hand Drive (RHD)models)

The door lock indicator light, located above the ash-tray, illuminates when all the doors are locked.

• When the doors are locked with the power doorlock switch, the door lock indicator light will illu-minate for 30 minutes.

• When the doors are locked by pushing theLOCK button on the Intelligent Key or any re-quest switch, the door lock indicator light will illu-minate for 1 minute.

• The door lock indicator light turns off when anydoor is unlocked.

For locking or unlocking doors, see “Door locks” inthe “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion.

Electronic Stability Programme(ESP) off indicator light(where fitted)

The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) off indi-cator light illuminates when the ESP off switch ispushed to the “OFF” position.

When the ESP off switch is pushed to the “OFF”position, the ESP system is turned off.

If the ESP off indicator light and slip indicator lightilluminate while the engine is running or while driv-ing, it may indicate the ESP system is not function-ing properly and may need servicing. Have the sys-


tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.(See “Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) (wherefitted)/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-tion.)

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCKindicator light (4WD model)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theFour-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indicator light illu-minates and then turns off.

When selecting the 4WD LOCK mode while theengine is running, the 4WD LOCK indicator lightilluminates. (See “Four-wheel drive (4WD)” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.)

Front fog light indicator light

The front fog light indicator light illuminates whenthe front fog lights are on. (See “Fog light switch”later in this section.)

High beam indicator light

The high beam indicator light illuminates when theheadlight high beam is on. The indicator turns offwhen the low beam is selected. (See “Headlightand turn signal switch” later in this section.)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

CAUTION

• Continuing vehicle operation without properservicing of the engine control system couldlead to poor driveability, reduced fueleconomy, and damage to the engine controlsystem, which may affect the vehicle’s war-ranty coverage.

• Incorrect setting of the engine control systemmay lead to non-compliance of local and na-tional emission laws and regulations.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illuminates. Afterstarting the engine, the MIL turns off. This indicatesthat the engine control system is operational.

If the MIL illuminates while the engine is running, itmay indicate that the engine control system is notfunctioning properly and may need servicing. Havethe vehicle checked, and if necessary repaired, by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.

If the MIL blinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential malfunction in the emission con-trol system. In this case, the emission control sys-tem may not function properly and may need servic-ing. Have the system checked, and if necessaryrepaired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshoppromptly.

Precautions:

To reduce or avoid possible damage to the enginecontrol system when the MIL blinks:

• Avoid driving at speeds above 70 km/h (43MPH).

• Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration.

• Avoid going up steep uphill grades.

• Avoid carrying or towing unnecessary loads.

Rear fog light indicator light(where fitted)

The rear fog light indicator light illuminates when therear fog light turns on. (See “Fog light switch” laterin this section.)

Slip indicator light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, theslip indicator light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates that the Electronic Stability Programme(ESP) system or Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system is operational.

The slip indicator light blinks when the ESP or VDCsystem is operating.

When the indicator light blinks while driving, thedriving condition is slippery and the vehicle’s trac-tion limit is about to be exceeded.

If the ESP off or VDC off indicator light and slip indi-cator light illuminate while the engine is running orwhile driving, it may indicate that the ESP or VDCsystem is not functioning properly and may needservicing. Have the system checked, and if neces-sary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-shop promptly. (See “Electronic Stability Pro-


gramme (ESP) (where fitted)/Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol (VDC) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.)

Small light indicator light

The small light indicator light illuminates when thefront clearance lights, instrument panel lights, rearcombination lights and number plate lights are on.The indicator light turns off when the is turnedoff.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The turn signal/hazard indicator lights blink whenthe turn signal switch lever or hazard indicatorflasher switch is on. (See “Hazard indicator flasherswitch” later in this section or “Headlight and turnsignal switch” later in this section.)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)off indicator light (where fitted)

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicatorlight illuminates when the VDC off switch is pushedto the “OFF” position.

When the VDC off switch is pushed to the “OFF”position, the VDC system is turned off.

If the VDC off indicator light and slip indicator lightilluminate while the engine is running or while driv-ing, it may indicate the VDC system is not function-ing properly and may need servicing. Have the sys-tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop promptly.

(See “Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) (wherefitted)/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-tion.)

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a brake pad requires replacement, it will makea high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is inmotion whether or not the footbrake pedal is de-pressed.

Have the system checked, and if necessary re-paired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshoppromptly. (See “Brakes” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.)

Key reminder chimeThe key reminder chime will sound if any of the fol-lowing operations are detected:

• The driver’s door is opened while the ignitionswitch is in the ACC position.

• The driver’s door is opened while the ignitionswitch is in the “OFF” or LOCK position and theIntelligent Key is left in the Intelligent Key port.

• The power door lock switch is pushed to thelock position while the driver’s door is open andthe Intelligent Key is left in the Intelligent Keyport.

• The power door lock switch is pushed to thelock position while any door is opened.

Be sure that the ignition switch is switched to theLOCK position when the door is opened, and carrythe Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

For models with the Intelligent Key system, an in-side or outside chime will sound under some condi-tions. When a chime sounds, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key. (See “IntelligentKey system” in the “3. Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.)

Light reminder chimeThe light reminder chime will sound if the driver’sside door is opened if any of the following opera-tions are detected:

• The headlight switch is in either the orposition, and the ignition switch is in the ACC,“OFF” or LOCK position.

The chime will also sound for 2 seconds when theignition switch is pushed to the ACC, “OFF” orLOCK position while the fog lights are on with theheadlight switch in the “AUTO” position.

Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the “OFF” or“AUTO” position (with the fog light switch in the“OFF” position) when you leave the vehicle.

Parking brake reminderThe parking brake reminder chime will sound if thevehicle is driven at more than 7 km/h (4 MPH) withthe parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and re-lease the parking brake.


Seat belt warning chimeThe chime will sound for about 6 seconds unlessthe driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display j1 is located inthe speedometer, and it displays the Intelligent Keyoperation information and other warnings and infor-mation.

• Intelligent Key system

– “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

– “Push-button ignition switch” in the “5. Start-ing and driving” section.

SIC3576Z

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTALDISPLAY


INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicatorThis indicator appears when the selector lever is inthe P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start bypushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal de-pressed. You can start the engine directly in anyposition.

2. Steering lock release malfunctionindicatorThis indicator appears when the steering wheel can-not be released from the LOCK position.

If this indicator appears, push the ignition switchwhile lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

3. Intelligent Key insertion indicatorThis indicator appears when the Intelligent Keyneeds to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.(For example, when the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.)

If this indicator appears, insert the Intelligent Key

SIC3901


into the Intelligent Key port in the correct direction.(See “Push-button ignition switch” in the “5. Start-ing and driving” section.)

4. Intelligent Key removal indicatorThis indicator appears when the driver’s door isopened with the ignition switch in the “OFF” orLOCK position and the Intelligent Key placed in theIntelligent Key port. A key reminder chime alsosounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent Keyfrom the Intelligent Key port and take it with youwhen leaving the vehicle.

5. NO KEY warningThis warning appears in either of the following con-ditions.

No key inside the vehicle:

The warning appears when the door is closed withthe Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and theignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Makesure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

The warning appears when the ignition switch ispushed from the LOCK position and the IntelligentKey cannot be recognised by the system. You can-not start the engine with an unregistered key. Usethe registered Intelligent Key.

For more details, see “Intelligent Key system” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

6. SHIFT “P” warningThis warning appears when the ignition switch ispushed to stop the engine with the selector lever inany position except the P (Park) position. An insidewarning chime will also sound.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever tothe P (Park) position or push the ignition switch tothe ON position.

7. “PUSH” warningThis warning appears when the selector lever ismoved to the P (Park) position with the ignitionswitch in the ACC position after the SHIFT P warn-ing appears.

To push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position,perform the following procedure:

SHIFT P warning → (Move the selector lever to P)→ PUSH warning → (Push the ignition switch →ignition switch position is turned to ON) → PUSHwarning → (Push the ignition switch → ignitionswitch position is turned to “OFF”)

8. Intelligent Key battery dischargeindicatorThis indicator appears when the Intelligent Key bat-tery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery with anew one. (See “Intelligent Key battery” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

9. Parking brake release warningThis warning appears when the vehicle speed isabove 7 km/h (4 MPH) and the parking brake isapplied. Release the parking brake to turn off thewarning.

10. Low fuel warningThis warning appears when the fuel level in the tankis getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty(E) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining inthe tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty(E) position.

11. Low washer fluid warningThis warning appears when the washer tank fluid isat a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See“Window washer fluid” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.)

12. Door/back door open warning(ignition switch is in the ON position)This warning appears if any of the doors and/or theback door are open or not closed securely. Thevehicle icon indicates which door, or the back door,is open on the display. Make sure that all of thedoors and the back door are closed.

13. “Time to rest” indicatorThis indicator appears when the set “time to rest”indicator activates. You can set the time up to 6hours. (See “Trip computer” later in this section.)


14. Low outside temperature warningThis warning appears if the outside temperature isbelow 3°C (37°F). The warning can be set not to bedisplayed. (See “Trip computer” later in this sec-tion.)

MAINTENANCE INDICATORS

1. Engine oil replacement indicatorThis indicator appears when the set time comes forchanging the engine oil. You can set or reset thedistance for changing the engine oil. (See “Tripcomputer” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicatorThis indicator appears when the set time comes forreplacing the oil filter. You can set or reset the dis-tance for replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip computer”later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicatorThis indicator appears when the set time comes forreplacing tyres. You can set or reset the distance forreplacing tyres. (See “Trip computer” later in thissection.)

4. “OTHER” indicatorThis indicator appears when the set time comes forreplacing items other than the engine oil, oil filterand tyres. You can set or reset the distance forreplacing the items. (See “Trip computer” later inthis section.)

More maintenance reminders are also available onthe centre display. (See “How to use INFO button”in the “4. Display screen, heater and air conditioner,and audio system” section.)

SIC3578Z


TRIP COMPUTERSwitches for the trip computer are located on theright side of the combination meter panel. To oper-ate the trip computer, push the switches as shownabove.

jA switchjB switch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON posi-tion, modes of the trip computer can be selected bypushing the switch jA .

Each time the switch jA is pushed, the displaywill change as follows:

Current fuel consumption → Average fuel consump-tion and speed → Elapsed time and trip odometer→ Distance to empty (dte) → Outside air tempera-ture (ICY) → Setting → Warning check

1. Current fuel consumption (km/l, l/100km or MPG)The current fuel consumption mode shows the cur-rent fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (km/l, l/100km or MPG) and speed (km/h or MPH)Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode shows the av-erage fuel consumption since the last reset. Reset-ting is done by pushing the switch jB forlonger than 1 second. (The average speed is alsoreset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At aboutthe first 500 m after a reset, the display shows “----”.

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the average ve-hicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is doneby pushing the switch jB for longer than 1second. (The average fuel consumption is also resetat the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. For thefirst 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows“----”.

SIC3580Z SIC3696Z

SIC3697Z


3. Elapsed time and trip odometer (kmor MILES)Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset by push-ing the switch jB for longer than 1 second.(The trip odometer is also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total distancethat the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.Resetting is done by pushing the switch jB forlonger than 1 second. (The elapsed time is alsoreset at the same time.)

4. Distance to empty (dte — km orMILES)The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you withan estimation of the distance that can be drivenbefore refuelling. The dte is constantly being calcu-lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tankand the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning feature.If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed onthe screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte dis-play will change to “----”.

• If the amount of fuel added is small, the displayjust before the ignition switch is pushed to the“OFF” position may continue to be displayed.

• When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuelin the tank shifts, which may momentarily changethe display.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY — °C)The outside air temperature is displayed in °C in therange of −30 to 55°C.

The outside air temperature mode includes a lowtemperature warning feature. If the outside air tem-perature is below 3°C, the warning is displayed onthe screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located in front ofthe radiator. The sensor may be affected by road orengine heat, wind directions and other driving con-ditions. The display may differ from the actual out-side temperature or the temperature displayed onvarious signs or billboards.

SIC3902Z SIC3699Z SIC3903Z


SettingSetting cannot be made while driving. A mes-sage “Setting can only be operated whenstopped” is also displayed on the dot matrix crys-tal display.

The switch jA and switch jB are usedin the setting mode.

Push the jB switch to select a menu.

Push the jA switch to decide a menu.

SKIP:

Push the switch jA to move to the warningcheck mode.

Push the switch jB to select other menus.

ALERT:

There are 3 submenus under the alert menu.

• BACKSelect this submenu to return to the top page ofthe setting mode.

• TIMERSelect this submenu to specify when the“TIMER” indicator activates.

• ICYSelect this submenu to display the low outsidetemperature warning.

MAINTENANCE:

There are 5 submenus under the maintenance menu.


• OILSelect this submenu to set or reset the distancefor changing the engine oil.

• FILTERSelect this submenu to set or reset the distancefor replacing the oil filter.

• TYRESelect this submenu to set or reset the distancefor replacing tyres.

• OTHERSelect this submenu to set or reset the distancefor replacing items other than the engine oil, oilfilter and tyres.

OPTIONS:

There are 3 submenus under the display menu.


• LANGUAGE (where fitted)Select this submenu to choose language for thedisplay.

• UNITSelect this submenu to choose the unit (km/l,l/100 km, etc.) for the display.

• EFFECTSSelect this menu to set the dial effects describedbelow to on or off.

– The indicator needles sweep in the metersand the ring illumination will be brightenedgradually when the engine is started.

Warning checkTo see if there are any of the following warnings andcorresponding details, select this menu.

• No key warning

SIC3678Z

SIC3679Z


• Low fuel warning

• Low washer fluid warning

• Parking brake release warning

• Door/back door open warning

SKIP:

Push the switch jA to move to the current fuelconsumption display.

Push the switch jB to select other menu.

DETAIL:

This item is available only when a warning is dis-played.

Select this menu to see the details of warnings.

XENON HEADLIGHTS (where fitted)

WARNING

m HIGH VOLTAGE

• When xenon headlights are on, they producea high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-ways have the xenon headlights checked and/or replaced at a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

• Xenon headlights provide considerably morelight than conventional headlights. If they arenot correctly aimed, they might temporarilyblind an oncoming driver or a driver ahead ofyou and could cause a serious accident. Im-mediately take your vehicle to a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop and have theheadlights adjusted correctly.

When the xenon headlights are initially turned on,their brightness and colour vary slightly. However,the colour and brightness will soon stabilise.

• The life of xenon headlights will be shortened byfrequent on-off operation. It is generally desir-able not to turn off the headlights for short inter-vals.

• If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burningout, the brightness will drastically decrease, theheadlight will start blinking, or the colour of theheadlight will become reddish. If one or more ofthe above conditions appear, contact a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

Automatic aiming controlVehicles with xenon headlights are equipped withthe automatic levelling system. Headlight axis is con-trolled automatically.

HEADLIGHT SWITCHNISSAN recommends that you consult the localregulations concerning the use of lights.

AUTO positionWhen the ignition switch is in the ON position andthe headlight switch is in the “AUTO” position j1 ,the headlights, front clearance lights, instrumentpanel lights, rear combination lights and other lightsturn on automatically depending on the brightnessof the surroundings.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the “OFF”position, the lights will turn off automatically.

SIC3904Z

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to 180 sec-onds after you push the ignition switch to OFF andopen any door then close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic head-lights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 sec-onds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds. Forautomatic headlights off delay setting, see “Vehicleinformation and settings” later in this section.

CAUTION

Do not place any objects on top of the sensor jA .The sensor senses the brightness level and con-trols the autolight function. If the sensor is cov-ered, it reacts as if it is dark, and the headlightswill illuminate.

m position

The position j2 turns on the front clearance,instrument panel, tail and number plate lights.

m position

The position j3 turns on the headlights inaddition to the other lights.

Headlight beamTo turn on the high beam, push the lever towardsthe front position j2 .

To turn off the high beam, return the lever to theneutral position j1 .

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards therearmost position j3 . The headlights can be flashedeven when the headlights are not on.

When the lever is pulled towards the rearmost posi-tion j3 after the ignition switch is pushed to the“OFF” or LOCK position, the headlight will turn onand stay on for 30 seconds.

The lever can be pulled 4 times for up to 2 minutes.

Daytime light system (where fitted)Even if the headlight switch is off, the daytime lightswill come on after starting the engine. However, youcannot change low beam to high beam when thelight switch is off.

When the light switch is turned to the position,the headlight low beam will turn off.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEMThe light reminder chime will sound if the driver’sdoor is opened while the following improper opera-tions occur:

• The headlight switch is in either the orposition, and the ignition switch in the ACC,“OFF” or LOCK position.

• The headlight switch is in the “AUTO” positionand the front or rear fog light (where fitted) isturned on while the ignition switch is in the ACC,“OFF” or LOCK

Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the “OFF” or“AUTO” position when you leave the vehicle.

When the headlight switch is in the orposition while the engine is running, the lights willautomatically turn off after pushing the ignitionswitch to the ACC, “OFF” or LOCK position andopening the driver’s side door.

When the headlight switch remains in either theor position after the lights automatically turnoff, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position.

SAA0642AZ

SIC3905Z


CAUTION

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is notrunning for extended periods of time to preventthe battery from being discharged.

HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROLFor the vehicle equipped with the automatic level-ling system, the headlight axis is controlled auto-matically.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCHCAUTION

The turn signal switch will not be cancelled auto-matically if the steering wheel turning angle doesnot exceed the preset amount. After the turn orlane change, make sure that the turn signalswitch is returned to its original position.

Turn signalTo turn on the turn signals, move the lever up j1 ordown j2 to the point where the lever latches. Whenthe turn is completed, the turn signal cancels auto-matically.

Lane change signalTo turn on the lane change signals, move the leverup j1 or down j2 to the point where the light be-gins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

If the lever is moved back right after moving up j1or down j2 , the light will flash 3 times (where fit-ted).

To cancel the flashing, move the lever to the oppo-site direction.

FRONT FOG LIGHTSTo turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog lightswitch to the position j1 with the headlightswitch in the or position.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch tothe “OFF” position.

When the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” posi-tion:

• Turning the fog light switch to the positionwill turn on the headlights, fog lights and theother lights while the ignition switch is in the ONposition or the engine is running.

REAR FOG LIGHT (where fitted)To turn on the rear fog light, turn the fog light switchto the position j2 . The switch returns to the

position automatically, and the rear fog lightwill illuminate with the front fog lights. Make sure the

indicator light on the instrument panel illumi-nates.

SIC3906Z

SIC3907Z

FOG LIGHT SWITCH


To turn off the rear fog light, turn the fog light switchto the position again. Make sure the indi-cator light on the instrument panel turns off.

To turn off both the front and rear fog lights, turn thefog light switch to the “OFF” position.

When the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” posi-tion:

• Turning the fog light switch to the positionwill turn on the headlights, fog lights and theother lights while the ignition switch is in the ONposition or the engine is running.

The rear fog light should be used only when visibilityis seriously reduced. [Generally, to less than 100 m(328 ft)]

WARNING

In freezing temperatures, the washer fluid mayfreeze on the windscreen and obscure your vi-sion. Warm the windscreen with the defogger be-fore you wash the windscreen.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continuously forlonger than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the windowwasher fluid reservoir is empty.

• If the wiper operation is interrupted by snowor ice, the wiper may stop moving to protectits motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switchto the “OFF” position and remove the snow orice on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again tooperate the wiper.

WINDSCREEN WIPER AND WASHERSWITCHThe windscreen wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Wiper operationThe lever position “ ” j1 operates the wiperintermittently.

• The intermittent operation can be adjusted byturning the adjustment control knob, (longer) jAor (shorter) jB .

• The speed of the intermittent operation variesdepending on the vehicle speed. Note that thefunction is set to disabled as the factory defaultsetting. This function can be switched on and offmanually. (See “How to use SETTING button” inthe “4. Display screen, heater and air conditioner,and audio system” section.)

The lever position AUTO j1 operates the rain-sens-ing auto wiper system. (See “Rain-sensing autowiper system” later in this section.)

The lever position “ ” j2 operates the wiper atlow speed.

The lever position “ ” j3 operates the wiper athigh speed.

To stop the wiper operation, move the lever up tothe “OFF” position.

The lever position “ ” j4 operates the wiperone sweep. The lever automatically returns to itsoriginal position.

SIC3908Z

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


Washer operationTo operate the washer, pull the lever toward theback of the vehicle j5 until the desired amount ofwasher fluid is spread on the windscreen. The wiperwill automatically operate several times.

The headlight cleaner (where fitted) will also oper-ate with operation of the windscreen washer. (See“Headlight cleaner (where fitted)” later in this sec-tion.)

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3 secondsafter the washer and wiper are operated. This op-eration is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped onthe windscreen.

Headlight cleaner (where fitted)Pull the lever toward the rear of the vehicle j5 .

The headlight cleaner will operate with operation ofthe windscreen washer.

• The headlight cleaner operates with the wind-screen washer operation. This operation acti-vates once each time either the ignition switch orthe headlight switch is turned off and on.

• After the first operation, the headlight cleaneroperates once at every fifth operation of thewindscreen washer.

CAUTION

Do not operate the headlight cleaner if the win-dow washer fluid reservoir is empty.

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPERSYSTEMThe rain-sensing auto wiper system can automati-cally turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speeddepending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed byusing the rain sensor located on the upper part ofthe windscreen.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push thelever down to the “AUTO” position j1 . The wiperwill sweep once while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted byturning the knob toward the front j2 (High) or to-ward the rear j3 (Low).

• High — High sensitive operation

• Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, pushup the lever to the “OFF” position, or pull down thelever to the “ ” (LO) or “ ” (HI) position.

CAUTION

Do not touch the rain sensor and around it whenthe wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position andthe ignition switch is in the ON position. The wip-ers may operate unexpectedly and cause to aninjury or a wiper damage.

• The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended foruse during rain. If the switch is left in the“AUTO” position, the wipers may operate un-expectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film orinsects are stuck on or around the sensor.The wipers may also operate when exhaustgas or moisture affect the rain sensor.

• The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operateif rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it israining.

SIC3909Z

SIC3910Z


REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER OPERATIONCAUTION

If the rear window wiper operation is interruptedby snow etc., the wiper may stop moving to pro-tect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switchto OFF and remove the snow etc. on and aroundthe wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn theswitch ON again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Wiper operationTurn the switch clockwise from the “OFF” positionto operate the wiper.

j1 “ ” (intermittent) — intermittent operation(not adjustable)

j2 “ ” (low) — continuous low speed operation

Reverse synchronisation function:

When the windscreen wiper switch is on, movingthe selector lever to the R (Reverse) position willoperate the rear window wiper and washer. Therear window wiper will be operated once every 7seconds while the above conditions are kept.

Washer operationPush the switch forward j3 to operate the washer.Then the wiper will also operate several times.

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3 secondsafter the washer and wiper are operated. This op-eration is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped onthe rear window.

The rear window and outside door mirror (where fit-ted) defogger switch operates when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The defogger is used to reduce the moisture, fog orfrost on the rear window surface to improve the rearviews and on the outside rearview mirror surface toimprove the side views (where fitted).

When the defogger switch j1 is pushed, the indica-tor light j2 illuminates and the defogger operatesfor approximately 15 minutes. After the preset timehas passed, the defogger will turn off automatically.To turn off the defogger manually, push the defog-ger switch again, and the indicator light turns off.

CAUTION

• When operating the defogger continuously,be sure to start the engine. Otherwise, it maycause the battery to discharge.

SIC3584Z

DEFOGGER SWITCH


• When cleaning the inner side of the window,be careful not to scratch or damage the elec-trical conductors on the surface of the win-dow.

The hazard indicator flasher switch operates regard-less of the ignition switch position except when thebattery is discharged.

The hazard indicator flasher is used to warn otherdrivers when you have to stop or park under emer-gency conditions.

When the hazard indicator flasher switch is pushed,all turn signal lights will flash. To turn off the hazardindicator flasher, push the hazard indicator flasherswitch again.

The horn switch operates regardless of the ignitionswitch position except when the battery isdischarged.

When the horn switch is pushed and held, the hornwill sound. Releasing the horn switch will cease thehorn sound.

SIC2574Z SIC3586Z

HAZARD INDICATOR FLASHERSWITCH

HORN


POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

• Make sure that all passengers have theirhands, etc. inside the vehicle before operat-ing the power windows.

• Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone inthe vehicle. They could unknowingly activateswitches or controls and inadvertentlybecome involved in an accident.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

1 Driver side window

2 Front passenger side window

3 Rear left passenger side window

4 Rear right passenger side window

5 Window lock button

Driver’s window switchThe driver’s switch, the main switch, can control allwindows.

To open a window, push down the power windowswitch.

To close a window, pull up the power windowswitch.

Locking passengers’ windows:

When the lock button jA is pushed in, the passen-gers’ windows cannot be operated.

To cancel the passengers’ windows lock, push thelock button jA again.

Passenger’s window switchThe passenger’s switch can control its correspond-ing window.

If the passengers’ windows lock button on the driv-er’s side switch is pushed in, the passenger’s switchcannot be operated.

SIC3640AZ

Type A

SIC3815Z

Type B

SIC3918Z

Type A

SIC3854Z

Type B

WINDOWS


Automatic functionThe automatic function is available for the switchthat has an mark on its surface.

The automatic function enables a window to fullyopen or close without holding the switch down orup.

To fully open the window, push the power windowswitch down to the second detent and release theswitch. To fully close the window, pull the powerwindow switch up to the second detent and releasethe switch. The switch does not have to be held dur-ing window operation.

To stop the window open/close operation duringthe automatic function, push down or pull up theswitch in opposite directions.

Window timer (where fitted):

The window timer allows the window switch to beoperated for approximately 45 seconds even if theignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. The

window timer will be cancelled when the driver’s orfront passenger’s door is opened or the preset timehas expired.

Auto-reverse function (where fitted):

WARNING

There is a small distance just before the closedposition which cannot be detected. Make surethat all passengers have their hands, etc. insidethe vehicle before closing the windows.

The auto-reverse function enables a window to au-tomatically reverse when something is caught in thewindow as it is closing by the automatic function.When the control unit detects an obstacle, the win-dow will be lowered immediately.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions,the auto-reverse function may activate if an impactor load similar to something being caught in the win-dow occurs.

If the windows do not closeautomaticallyIf the power window automatic function (closingonly) does not operate properly, perform the follow-ing procedure to initialise the power window sys-tem.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operating thepower window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to closethe window, and then hold the switch more than3 seconds after the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate thewindow by the automatic function to confirm theinitialisation is complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other win-dows.

If the power window automatic function does notoperate properly after performing the procedureabove, have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

SIC3509Z


WARNING

• In an accident you could be thrown from thevehicle through an open sunroof. Adultsshould always use seat belts and childrenshould always use seat belts or child restraintsystems.

• Never allow anyone to stand up or extend anyportion of their body out of the opening whilethe vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

• Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand fromthe sunroof before opening.

• Do not place any heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

• Do not push or pull on the sunshade. Doingso can damage the sunshade.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF ANDSUNSHADE

Sliding sunshade and sunroofWhen the OPEN side j1 of the sunroof switch ispushed, the front and rear sunshades will fully open.When the switch is pushed again, the sunroof willfully open.

When the CLOSE side j2 of the sunroof switch ispushed, the sunroof will automatically close. Pushthe switch again, and the front and rear sunshadeswill close.

When the OPEN or CLOSE side of the sunroofswitch is pushed to the second detent (j3 or j4 ),both the sunshade and sunroof will open or close.

To stop the sunshades or sunroof during the opera-tion, push either of the OPEN j1 , CLOSE j2 or UPj5 of the switch.

Tilting sunroofTo tilt up the sunroof, push the sunroof switch to theup position j5 .

To tilt down the sunroof, push the switch to the upposition j5 or push the CLOSE side j2 of theswitch.

When the sunroof is tilted up, push the CLOSE sideof the sunroof switch to the second detent j4 . Thesunroof will tilt down and the sunshades will close.

Auto-reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances just before theclosed position which cannot be detected. Makesure that all passengers have their hands, etc.inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof andsunshades.

The auto-reverse function enables the sunroof andsunshades to automatically reverse when somethingis caught in the sunroof and sunshades as it is clos-ing. When the control unit detects an obstacle, thesunroof and sunshades will open immediately.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions,the auto-reverse function may activate if an impactor load similar to something being caught in the sun-roof and sunshades occurs.

If the auto-reverse function activates consecutivelyor the battery is discharged, the sunroof and sun-shades may not close properly. In this case, pushand hold the “CLOSE” side j2 of the sunroof switchto close the sunroof.

If sunroof and sunshades do not operateIf the sunroof and sunshades do not operate prop-erly, perform the following procedure to initialise theoperation system.

1. If the sunroof and sunshades are open, closethem fully by repeatedly pushing the CLOSE j2side of the sunroof switch.

SIC3801Z

SUNROOF (where fitted)


2. Push and hold the CLOSE j2 side of the sun-roof switch for 10 seconds.

3. Release the sunroof switch after the sunroof andsunshades move slightly to the closed position.

4. Push and hold the CLOSE j2 side of the sun-roof switch for 10 seconds.

5. Release the sunroof switch. The sunroof andsunshades will fully open and then fully close.

6. Check if the sunroof switch operates normally.

If the sunroof does not operate properly after per-forming the procedure above, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

To use the power outlet, pull the cover as illustrated.

CAUTION

• The outlet and plug may be hot during or im-mediately after use.

• This power outlet is not designed for use witha cigarette lighter unit.

SIC3587Z

Centre console

SIC3651Z

Luggage compartment

SIC3652Z

Console box — Type A

SIC3653Z

Console box — Type B

POWER OUTLET


• Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not usedouble adapters or more than one electricalaccessory.

• Use this power outlet with the engine runningto avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

• Avoid using when the air conditioner, head-lights or rear window defogger is on.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If goodcontact is not made, the plug may overheat orthe internal temperature fuse may blow.

• Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, besure to turn off the power switch of the elec-trical accessory being used is turned off.

• When not in use, be sure that the cap isclosed. Do not allow water to come into con-tact with the outlet.

ASHTRAYTo open the ashtray, push the lid down and releaseit j1 .

To take out the ashtray, hold the ashtray inner casej2 and pull it out.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

WARNING

The cigarette lighter should not be used whiledriving so that full attention may be given to driv-ing operation.

CAUTION

• The cigarette lighter socket is a power sourcefor the cigarette lighter element only. The useof the cigarette lighter socket as a powersource for any other accessory is not recom-mended.

• Do not use any other power outlet for an ac-cessory lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be operated when the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push thelighter all the way in j3 . When the lighter is heated,it will spring out automatically.

Return the cigarette lighter to its original positionafter use.

SIC3588Z

ASHTRAYS AND CIGARETTELIGHTER (where fitted)


WARNING

• The storage compartments should not beused while driving so that the full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

• Keep the storage lids closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or a suddenstop.

GLOVE BOXTo open the glove box, pull the handle j1 .

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock j2 /unlock j3 the glove box, use the me-chanical key. For the mechanical key usage, see“Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.

CONSOLE BOXWhen the lever jA (left side) is pulled, the uppercase is available for storing some small items. Whenthe lever jB (right side) is pulled, the bottom case isavailable for storing some larger ones.

To open, push the knob j1 and pull out j2 .

SUNGLASSES HOLDER (where fitted)CAUTION

• Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.

• Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglassesholder while parking in direct sunlight. Theheat may damage the sunglasses.

To open the sunglasses holder, push j1 . To close,push the holder up until the lock latches.

SIC3948Z

SIC3654Z

Front

SIC3591Z

Rear

SIC3589Z

STORAGE


STORAGE BOX (where fitted)To open, push the storage box lid j1 as illustrated.

The inner tray can be removed j2 as illustrated.

Do not place valuable items in the storage box.

Do not use the storage box as an ashtray.

CUP HOLDERSCAUTION

Avoid abrupt starting and braking especiallywhen the cup holder is being used to preventspillage. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you oryour passengers.

FrontTo open the cup holder, push the lid j1 .

To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull it up asillustrated j2 .

RearThe cup holders for rear passengers are located onthe rear centre armrest.

To open the cup holder, pull the lid. Make sure thatthe lid is closed before storing the rear centre arm-rest in the seatback.

LUGGAGE FLOOR BOX (where fitted)To open the luggage floor box, push jA . To close,push the lid until the lock latches.

The net partitions can be removed jB to make alarger storage space.

The luggage floor box needs to be removed whenyou need to get access to the spare tyre. (See “Flattyre” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.)

CAUTION

To avoid damage, do not load more then 10 kg(22 lbs) of cargo into the luggage floor box.

SIC3593Z SIC3118Z

SIC3804Z

SIC3656Z


LUGGAGE HOOKS

WARNING

• Always make sure that the luggage is prop-erly secured. Use the suitable ropes andhooks.

• Unsecured luggage can become dangerousin an accident or sudden stop.

• Do not apply a total load of more than 10 kg(22 lb) jA and 3 kg (7 lb) jB to the hook.

COAT HOOKSCAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 1 kg (2 lb)to the hook.

The coat hooks are equipped at the rear assist grips.

LUGGAGE SIDE BOXTo open the luggage side box, pull up the strap.

SIC3596

SIC3248Z

SIC3594Z


TONNEAU COVERThe tonneau cover keeps the contents in the lug-gage compartment hidden from the outside.

To use the tonneau cover, pull it out and hang bothsides on the hooks j1 .

To use the sub cover, hang the straps on the backof the head restraint j2 .

To stow the tonneau cover, remove it from the hooksand hold until it is retracted.

To remove the tonneau cover, stow the cover andpull the holder to the opposite side j3 .

WARNING

• Never put anything on the tonneau cover, nomatter how small. Any object on it could causean injury in an accident or sudden stop.

• Close the tonneau cover when folding the rearseat.

• Do not leave the tonneau cover in the vehiclewith it disengaged from the holder.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or strapsto help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seatbacks. Ina sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargocould cause personal injury.

• Your child could be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the child restraint top tetherstrap is damaged.

– If the tonneau cover contacts the top tetherstrap when it is attached to the top tetheranchor, remove the cargo cover from thevehicle or secure it on the luggage floorbelow its attachment location. If the ton-neau cover is not removed, it may damagethe top tether strap during a collision.

– Do not allow cargo to contact the top tetherstrap when it is attached to the top tether

anchor. Properly secure the cargo so itdoes not contact the top tether strap.Cargo that is not properly secured or thatcontacts the top tether strap may damagethe top tether strap during a collision.

LUGGAGE NETThe luggage net helps keep packages in the lug-gage compartment from moving around while thevehicle is in motion.

To install the luggage net, attach the hooks to theretainers jA on both sides.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

SIC3595

SIC3657Z


• Be sure to secure all four hooks into the re-tainers. The cargo restrained in the net mustnot exceed 13.6 kg (30 lb) or the net may notstay secured.

ROOF RACK (where fitted)Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 100 kg (220 lb) on theroof rails. Observe the maximum load limit shown onthe crossbars or roof carries when you attach themon the roof rails. Contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop for crossbar or other equipment in-formation.

WARNING

• Drive extra carefully when the vehicle isloaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity,especially if the significant portion of that loadis carried on the roof rack.

• Heavy loading of the roof rack has the poten-tial to affect the vehicle stability and handlingduring sudden or unusual handling manoeu-vres.

• Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.

• Do not exceed maximum roof rack loadweight capacity.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or strapsto help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In asudden stop or collision, unsecured cargocould cause personal injury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items fromthe roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift theitems onto the roof rack from the ground, use aladder or stool.

1. To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor j1 .

2. To block glare from the side, remove the mainsun visor from the centre mount and swing it tothe side j2 .

SIC3639Z

SIC2872

SUN VISORS


CAUTION

• Turn off the lights when you leave the vehicle.

• Do not use the lights for extended periods oftime with the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHTSPush the button as illustrated to turn the light on oroff.

REAR PERSONAL LIGHTSPush the button as illustrated to turn the light on oroff.

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCHThe interior light control switch has three positions:ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON positionWhen the switch is in the ON position j1 , the maplights and rear personal lights will illuminate.

DOOR positionWhen the switch is in the DOOR position j2 , themap lights and rear personal lights will illuminateunder the following conditions:

• when the ignition switch is switched to the LOCKposition.

– The lights will remain on for about 15 sec-onds.

• when doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or doorhandle request switch with the ignition switch inthe LOCK position.


• when any door is opened and then closed withthe ignition switch in the LOCK position.


• when any door is opened with the ignition switchin the ACC or ON position.

– The lights will remain on while the door isopened. When the door is closed, the lightswill turn off.

OFF positionWhen the switch is in the “OFF” position j3 , thelights will not illuminate, regardless of the condition.

SIC3249Z

SIC3250Z

SIC3251Z

SIC3869Z

INTERIOR LIGHTS


VANITY MIRROR LIGHTSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor downand flip open the mirror cover.

The vanity mirror light illuminates when the vanitymirror cover is opened. When the cover is closed,the light will turn off.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHTWhen the switch is in the ON position j1 , the lightilluminates while the back door is opened. When theback door is closed, the light will go off.

When the switch is in the OFF position j2 , the lightwill turn off.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEMWhen the interior light stays on, it will automaticallyturn off after 30 minutes while the ignition switch isin the “OFF” position. To turn on the light again,push the ignition switch to the ON position.

SIC2131AZ


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustmentsPre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ........................................................................ 3-2Intelligent Key ..................................................... 3-2Mechanical key................................................... 3-3

Door locks ............................................................... 3-4Super Lock System (where fitted)....................... 3-4Locking with key................................................. 3-4Locking with inside lock knob ............................. 3-4Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5Child safety rear door locks ................................ 3-5

Intelligent Key system .............................................. 3-6Intelligent Key operating range............................ 3-7Using Intelligent Key system................................ 3-7Battery saver system........................................... 3-10Warning signals.................................................. 3-10Troubleshooting guide ........................................ 3-11Using remote keyless entry system ..................... 3-12Hazard indicator and horn operation.................... 3-13

Security system ....................................................... 3-14Theft warning system.......................................... 3-14NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)..................... 3-16

Bonnet..................................................................... 3-17Opening bonnet.................................................. 3-17

Closing bonnet ................................................... 3-17Back door................................................................ 3-17

Operating manual back door............................... 3-18Operating power back door (where fitted)........... 3-18Auto closure ....................................................... 3-20Back door release lever (where fitted)................. 3-20

Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-21Opening fuel filler lid ........................................... 3-21Fuel filler cap...................................................... 3-21

Steering wheel......................................................... 3-21Manual steering wheel adjustment ...................... 3-21Electric steering wheel adjustment ...................... 3-22

Mirrors..................................................................... 3-22Inside rearview mirror ......................................... 3-22Outside rearview mirrors..................................... 3-23Vanity mirror ....................................................... 3-24

Parking brake .......................................................... 3-24Automatic drive positioner (where fitted) .................. 3-25

Entry/exit function ............................................... 3-25Memory storage function .................................... 3-25System operation................................................ 3-26

A key number plate is supplied with your key. Recordthe key number on the key number plate and keep itin a safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN THEVEHICLE. NISSAN does not record key numbersso it is very important to keep track of your key num-ber plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lostall keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If youstill have a key, this key can be duplicated by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

1. Intelligent Key (2)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2)

3. Key number plate (1)

WARNING

• The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves thatcan adversely affect medical electric equip-ment.

• If you have a pacemaker, you should contactthe medical equipment manufacturer to ask ifit will be affected by the Intelligent Key signal.

INTELLIGENT KEYYour vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys, which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-gent Key system components and the NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) components. As many as 4Intelligent Keys can be registered and used withone vehicle. The new keys must be registered by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop prior to usewith the Intelligent Key system and NATS of yourvehicle. Since the registration process requireserasing all memory in the Intelligent Key systemcomponents when registering new keys, be sure totake all Intelligent Keys that you have to a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key functions be-come cancelled. Contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop.

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.Do not leave the vehicle with the IntelligentKey inside.

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with youwhen driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-sion device with a built-in transmitter. To avoiddamaging it, please note the following.

– The Intelligent Key is water resistant; how-ever, wetting may damage the Intelligent

SPA2502Z

Type A

SPA2543Z

Type B

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, imme-diately wipe until it is completely dry.

– Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-other object.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-tended period in a place where tempera-tures exceed 60°C (140°F).

– Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

– Do not use a magnet key holder.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field suchas a TV, audio equipment and personalcomputers.

– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to comeinto contact with water or salt water, anddo not wash it in a washing machine. Thiscould affect the system function.

• If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that In-telligent Key. This will prevent the IntelligentKey from unauthorised use to unlock the ve-hicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, please contact a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop.

MECHANICAL KEYTo remove the mechanical key, release the lock knobat the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into theIntelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lockposition.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doorsand glove box. (See “Door locks” later in this sec-tion and “Storage” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.)

Valet parkingWhen you have to leave a key with valets, give themthe Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanicalkey with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened duringvalet parking, follow the procedures below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the IntelligentKey.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key. (See“Storage” in the “2. Instruments and controls”section.)

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping themechanical key in your pocket or bag for inser-tion into the Intelligent Key when you retrieveyour vehicle.

SPA2033Z

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

WARNING

• Always look before opening any doors, toavoid an accident with oncoming traffic.

• Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone inthe vehicle. They could unknowingly activateswitches or controls and inadvertentlybecome involved in a serious accident.

SUPER LOCK SYSTEM (where fitted)

WARNING

For Super Lock System equipped models, failureto follow the precautions below may lead to haz-ardous situations. Make sure the Super Lock Sys-tem activation is always safely conducted.

• When the vehicle is occupied, never lock thedoors with the Intelligent Key system. Doingso will trap the occupants, since the SuperLock System prevents the doors from beingopened from the inside of the vehicle.

• Only operate the Intelligent Key lock buttonwhen there is a clear view of the vehicle. Thisis to prevent anybody from being trapped in-side the vehicle through the Super Lock Sys-tem activation.

Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key LOCKbutton or the request switch will lock all doorsincluding the back door and activate the Super LockSystem.

This means that none of the doors can be openedfrom the inside in order to prevent theft.

The system will be released when the door is un-locked with the Intelligent Key button or therequest switch.

The Super Lock System will not activate when thedoors are locked with the power door lock switch.

Emergency situationsIf the Super Lock System is activated due to a traf-fic accident or other unexpected circumstanceswhile you are in the vehicle:

• Push the ignition switch to the ON position, theSuper Lock System will be released and all thedoors can be unlocked with the power door lockswitch. You can then open the doors.

• Unlock the door using the Intelligent Key. TheSuper Lock System will be released and you canopen the door.

LOCKING WITH KEYThe door key cylinder is located on the driver’s sidedoor.

To lock the driver’s door, insert the mechanical keyto the door key cylinder and turn the key to the frontof the vehicle j1 .

To unlock the driver’s door, turn the key to the rearof the vehicle j2 .

To lock or unlock the other doors, use the powerdoor lock switch, the “UNLOCK” button onthe Intelligent Key or any request switch.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

For Left-Hand Drive (LHD) modelsTo lock the door, push the inside lock knob to thelock position j1 then close the driver’s side doorwith the outside door handle pulled.SPA2457AZ

SPA2465Z

DOOR LOCKS


CAUTION

When locking the doors using the inside lockknob, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inthe vehicle.

To unlock the door, pull the inside lock knob to theunlock position j2 .

For Right-Hand Drive (RHD) modelsTo unlock and open the door, pull the inside doorhandle as illustrated.

The doors cannot be opened by using the insidedoor handle when the Super Lock System is acti-vated.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHOperating the power door lock switch will lock orunlock all the doors.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch(located on the driver’s and front passenger’s door)to the lock position j1 then close the driver’s sidedoor with the outside door handle pulled.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the power doorlock switch, be sure not to leave the IntelligentKey in the vehicle.

To unlock the doors, push the power door lockswitch to the unlock position j2 .

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKSThe child safety rear door locks help prevent reardoors from being opened accidentally, especiallywhen small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position j1 , thechild safety rear door locks engage and the reardoors can only be opened by the outside doorhandles.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock posi-tion j2 .

SPA2544Z

SPA2183Z SPA2433Z


WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medi-cal equipment. Those who use a pacemakershould contact the electric medical equipmentmanufacturer for the possible influences beforeuse.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the doorand the back door using the remote controller func-tion or pushing the request switch on the vehiclewithout taking the key out from a pocket or purse.The operating environment and/or conditions mayaffect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the Intel-ligent Key system.

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with youwhen operating the vehicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehiclewhen you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The IntelligentKey system transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the operationof the Intelligent Key system under the followingoperating conditions.

• When operating near a location where strongradio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower,power station and broadcasting station.

• When in possession of wireless equipment, suchas a mobile telephone, transceiver, and CB ra-dio.

• When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

• When any type of radio wave remote control isused nearby.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed near an elec-tric appliance such as a personal computer.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions be-fore using the Intelligent Key function or use themechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending onthe operating conditions, the battery’s life is approxi-mately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replaceit with a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipment whichtransmits strong radio waves, such as signals froma TV and personal computer, the battery life maybecome shorter.

For battery replacement details, see “Intelligent Keybattery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switchin the LOCK position is impossible when the vehiclebattery is completely discharged. In this case, un-locking the steering wheel would be also impossible

even if the Intelligent Key was inserted into the Intel-ligent Key port. Pay special attention that the vehiclebattery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered andused with one vehicle. For information about thepurchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, con-tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-tains electrical components, to come into con-tact with water or salt water. This could affectthe system function.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

• Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

• Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

• Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If theIntelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe un-til it is completely dry.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-tended period in an area where temperaturesexceed 60°C (140°F).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field, such asa TV, audio equipment and personal comput-ers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recom-

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM


mends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Keyfrom the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthoriseduse of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing procedure, con-tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. Forinformation about disabling the Intelligent Key func-tion, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-shop.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATINGRANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only be used whenthe Intelligent Key is within the specified operatingrange from the request switch j1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operatinglocation, the Intelligent Key system’s operatingrange becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Keymay not function properly.

The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) fromeach request switch j1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,door handle or rear bumper, the request switchesmay not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someone who

does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the re-quest switch to lock/unlock the doors including theback door.

USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEMThe request switch will not function under the fol-lowing conditions:

• When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

SPA2074Z

SPA2408Z


• When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-tional range

• When any door is open or not closed securely

• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged

• When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition

• Do not push the door handle request switch withthe Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated.The close distance to the door handle will causethe Intelligent Key system to have difficulty rec-ognising that the Intelligent Key is outside thevehicle.

• After locking the doors using the door handlerequest switch, make sure that the doors havebeen securely locked by operating the doorhandles.

• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in-side the vehicle, make sure you carry the keywith you and then lock the doors.

• Do not pull the door handle before pushing thedoor handle request switch. The door will beunlocked but will not open. Release the doorhandle once and pull it again to open the door.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you canlock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handlerequest switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) jA orback door request switch jB within the range ofoperation.

When you lock or unlock the doors including theback door, the hazard indicator will flash and the

SPA2407Z

SPA2500Z

SPA2545Z


horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-tion. For details, see “Hazard indicator and hornoperation” later in this section.

Locking doors1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position,

push the ignition switch to the “OFF” positionand carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the door handle request switch jA (driver’sor front passenger’s) or the back door requestswitch jB .

4. All doors and the back door will be locked.

For Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models: The doorlock indicator light (located on the centreinstrument panel) will illuminate for 1 minute.

5. Operate door handles to confirm that the doorshave been securely locked.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acciden-tally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key system.

• When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle andyou try to lock the door using the power doorlock switch or the driver’s inside lock knob aftergetting out of the vehicle, all the doors will un-lock automatically and a chime will sound afterthe door is closed.

• When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehiclewhile the driver’s door is opened and you try to

lock the door using the power door lock switchafter getting out of the vehicle, an inside warningchime will sound after the power door lock switchor the driver’s inside lock knob is operated.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function underthe following conditions:

• When the Intelligent Key is placed on top ofthe instrument panel.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed on the ton-neau cover.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside ofthe glove box.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside ofthe door pockets.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed on or underthe spare tyre area.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside ornear metallic materials.

The lockout protection may function when theIntelligent Key is outside the vehicle but is tooclose to the vehicle.

Unlocking doorsSwitching door unlock mode:

To change the door unlock mode from one mode toanother, see “Using remote keyless entry system”later in this section.

Selective door unlock mode:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Push the door handle request switch jA or theback door request switch jB .

3. The corresponding door and the back door willbe unlocked.

4. Push the door handle request switch again within30 seconds.

5. All doors will be unlocked.

6. Operate the door handles to open the doors.

All door unlock mode:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Push the door handle request switch jA or backdoor request switch jB .

3. All doors and the back door will be unlocked.

The back door can be unlocked and opened bypushing the back door opener switch. See “Backdoor” later in this section.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors,that door may not be unlocked. Returning the doorhandle to its original position will unlock the door. Ifthe door does not unlock, after returning the doorhandle, push the door handle request switch to un-lock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one ofthe following operations is performed within 30 sec-onds after pushing the request switch while thedoors are locked.


• Opening any doors.

• Pushing the ignition switch.

If during the preset time period the “UNLOCK”button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors willbe locked automatically after the next preset time.

Opening power back door (where fitted)1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the power back door opener switch jC .

3. The back door will unlock and automaticallyopen.

4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the out-side chime sounds.

To close the back door, push the power back doorbutton on the Intelligent Key, the power back doorswitch on the instrument panel or the lower part ofthe back door. (See “Back door” later in this sec-tion.)

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEMWhen all the following conditions are met for 60minutes, the battery saver system will cut off thepower supply to prevent battery discharge.

• The ignition switch is in the ACC position, and

• All doors are closed, and

• The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALSThe Intelligent Key system is equipped with a func-tion that is designed to minimise improper opera-tions of the Intelligent Key and to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen. The warning buzzersounds and the warning display appears on the dotmatrix liquid crystal display when improper opera-tions are detected.

See the troubleshooting guide on the next page. Forwarning and indicators on the dot matrix liquid crys-tal display, see “DOT matrix liquid crystal display” inthe “2. Instruments and controls” section.

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warning displayappears, be sure to check both the vehicle andthe Intelligent Key.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on thedisplay and the inside warning chimesounds continuously.

The selector lever is not in the P(Park) position.

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver’s door to getout of the vehicle

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACCposition.

Push the ignition switch to the “OFF”position.

The Intelligent Key is in the IntelligentKey port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port.

When closing the door after gettingout of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3times and the inside warning chimesounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC orON position.

Push the ignition switch to the “OFF”position.

The SHIFT P warning appears on thedisplay and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or“OFF” position and the selector leveris not in the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P(Park) position and push the ignitionswitch to the “OFF” position.

When closing the door with the insidelock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds forapproximately 3 seconds and all thedoors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle or luggage room.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handlerequest switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds forapproximately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle or luggage room.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch ispushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switchafter the door is closed.


USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEM

Operating rangeThe remote keyless entry system allows you to lock/unlock all doors including the back door and the fuelfiller lid. The operating distance depends upon theconditions around the vehicle. To securely operatethe lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle toabout 1 m (3.3 ft) from the door.

The remote keyless entry system will not functionunder the following conditions:

• When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-tional range.

• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

Locking doorsWhen you lock or unlock the doors including theback door, the hazard indicator will flash as a con-firmation. For details, see “Hazard indicator and hornoperation” later in this section.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position,push the ignition switch to the “OFF” positionand carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors including the back door.

3. Push the LOCK button jA on the Intelli-gent Key.

4. All doors including the back door will be locked.

For Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models: The doorlock indicator light (located on the centreinstrument panel) will illuminate for 1 minute.

5. Operate the door handles to confirm that thedoors have been securely locked.

CAUTION

• After locking the doors using the IntelligentKey, be sure that the doors have been se-curely locked by operating the door handles.

• When locking the doors using the IntelligentKey, be sure not to leave the key in the ve-hicle.

Unlocking doorsTo change the door unlock mode from one mode toanother, see the following section.

Switching door unlock mode:

To switch the door unlock mode from one mode toanother, push the LOCK and “UNLOCK”buttons on the Intelligent Key simultaneously formore than 4 seconds.

• When the selective door unlock mode is set, thehazard indicator flashes 3 times.

• When the all door unlock mode is set, the hazardindicator flashes once.

Selective door unlock mode:

1. Push the “UNLOCK” button jB on the In-telligent Key.

2. The driver’s door will be unlocked.

3. Push the “UNLOCK” button again within30 seconds.

4. All doors including the back door will be un-locked.

5. Operate the door handles to open the doors.

SPA2349Z

Type A

SPA2546Z

Type B


All door unlock mode:

1. Push the “UNLOCK” button jB on the In-telligent Key.

2. All doors (including the back door) will be un-locked.

All doors including the back door and will be lockedautomatically unless one of the following operationsis performed within 30 seconds after pushing the“UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key whilethe doors are locked.

• Opening any doors.

• Pushing the ignition switch.

If during the preset time period the “UNLOCK”button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors willbe locked automatically after the next preset time.

Opening or closing back door(where fitted)The power back door button jC cannot beoperated when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

Opening:

1. Push the power back door button jCfor more than 1 second.

2. The back door will automatically open.

The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outsidechime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

Closing:

1. Push the power back door button jC .

2. The back door will automatically close.

If the button jC is pushed while the backdoor is being opened or closed, the back door willreverse.

HAZARD INDICATOR AND HORNOPERATIONWhen you lock or unlock the doors including theback door with the request switch or the remotekeyless entry function (described earlier in this sec-tion), the hazard indicator will flash and the horn orthe outside chime will sound as a confirmation.

The following descriptions show how the hazardindicator and horn/chime will activate when lockingor unlocking the doors including the back door.

Operation DOOR LOCKDOOR

UNLOCKIntelligent Keysystem(using requestswitch)

HAZARD -once

HAZARD -twice

Remote key-less entrysystem

(using m or

m button)

HAZARD -once

HAZARD -twice


Your vehicle is equipped with both of the followingsecurity systems:

• Theft warning system

• NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)

The security condition will be shown by the securityindicator light.

THEFT WARNING SYSTEMThe theft warning system provides visual and audioalarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.

Security indicator lightThe security indicator light jA is located on the in-strument panel near the windscreen.

This light operates whenever the ignition switch is inthe ACC, “OFF” or LOCK position. This is normal.

For models with ultrasonic and tiltsensorsHow to activate system:

1. Close all windows and sunroof/sunshade (wherefitted).

2. Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.

3. Carry the Intelligent Key with you and get out ofthe vehicle.

4. Make sure the bonnet is closed. Close and lockall doors with the Intelligent Key system.

If a door is open, the buzzer will sound. Thebuzzer will stop when the door is correctlyclosed.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light comeson. The security indicator light blinks rapidly forabout 20 seconds and then blinks slowly. Thesystem is now activated. If, during this 20-sec-ond time period, the door is unlocked by theIntelligent Key system, or the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position, the system will notactivate.

Even when the driver and/or passengers are inthe vehicle, the system will activate with all doorslocked and the ignition switch off. Push the igni-tion switch to the ON position to turn the systemoff.

If the system malfunctions, the short beepsounds 5 times when the system is activated.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Theft warning system operation:

The warning system will give the following alarm:

• The hazard indicator blinks and the alarm soundsintermittently for approximately 30 seconds. (Thealarm will repeat 8 times.)

• The alarm automatically turns off after approxi-mately 30 seconds. However, the alarm reacti-vates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated when:

• operating the door without using the IntelligentKey system.

• operating the bonnet.

• the volumetric sensing system (ultrasonic sen-sors) is triggered (when it is activated).

• the vehicle inclination is detected by the tilt sen-sors (when they are activated).

How to stop alarm:

• The alarm will stop by unlocking a door with the“UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key orthe door handle request switch.

• The alarm will stop if the ignition switch is pushedto the ON position.

SIC1699AZ

SECURITY SYSTEM


Cancel switch for ultrasonic and tilt sensors:

The ultrasonic sensors (volumetric sensing) detectmovement in the passenger’s compartment. The tiltsensors detect the vehicle inclination. When the theftwarning system is set to the armed position, it willautomatically switch on the ultrasonic and tilt sen-sors.

CAUTION

Do not touch the ultrasonic sensors jA . Thiscould damage the sensors.

It is possible to exclude the ultrasonic and tilt sen-sors (e.g. when leaving pets inside the car or trans-porting the vehicle on a ferry).

To exclude the ultrasonic and tilt sensors:

1. Close all the windows.


3. Push the cancel switch jB located on the maplight. The security indicator light will start flashingrapidly (three times a second).

4. Close the doors, bonnet and boot. Lock themusing the Intelligent Key system. The security in-dicator light will start flashing faster and a buzzerwill sound once.

The ultrasonic and tilt sensors are now excludedfrom the theft warning system. All other functions ofthe system remain activated until the theft warningsystem is disarmed again.

For models without ultrasonic and tiltsensorsHow to activate system:

1. Close all windows and sunroof/sunshade (wherefitted).


3. Carry the Intelligent Key with you and get out ofthe vehicle.

4. Make sure the bonnet is closed. Close and lockall doors with the Intelligent Key system.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light comeson. The security indicator light blinks rapidly forabout 20 seconds and then blinks slowly. Thesystem is now activated. If, during this 20-sec-ond time period, the door is unlocked by theIntelligent Key system, or the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position, the system will notactivate.

Even when the driver and/or passengers are inthe vehicle, the system will activate with all doorslocked and the ignition switch off. Push the igni-tion switch to the ON position to turn the systemoff.

Theft warning system operation:

The warning system will give the following alarm:

• The hazard indicator blinks and the horn soundsintermittently for approximately 30 seconds. (Thealarm will repeat 8 times.)

• The alarm automatically turns off after approxi-mately 30 seconds. However, the alarm reacti-vates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated when:

• operating the door without using the IntelligentKey system.

• operating the bonnet.

How to stop alarm:

• The alarm will stop by unlocking a door with the“UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key orthe door handle request switch.

• The alarm will stop if the ignition switch is pushedto the ON position.

If the system does not operate as describedabove, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop.

SPA2551Z


NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will not al-low the engine to start without the use of the regis-tered NATS key.

Security indicator lightThe security indicator light jA is located on the in-strument panel near the windscreen. It indicates thestatus of NATS.

The light operates whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, ACC or “OFF” position. The securityindicator light indicates that the security systems onthe vehicle are operational.

If NATS is malfunctioning, this light will remain onwhile the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light remains on and/or the engine doesnot start, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop for NATS service as soon as possible.

Be sure to bring all NATS Keys that you havewhen visiting a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-shop for service.

For Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models:

If NATS is malfunctioning, the security indicator lightwill illuminate when the ignition switch is in the ONposition. However, if the security indicator light turnsoff after 15 minutes, you can start the engine once.See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for ser-vice as soon as possible.

SIC1699AZ


WARNING

• The bonnet must be closed and latched se-curely before driving. Failure to do so couldcause the bonnet to fly open and result in anaccident.

• Never open the bonnet if steam or smoke iscoming from the engine compartment toavoid injury.

OPENING BONNET1. Pull the bonnet lock release handle j1 located

below the instrument panel until the bonnetsprings up.

2. Locate the lever j2 in between the bonnet andgrille and push the lever up with your fingertips.

3. Raise the bonnet.

CLOSING BONNETSlowly move the bonnet down to latch both the rightand left locks. Push the bonnet down to lock thebonnet securely into place.

WARNING

• Always be sure the back door has been closedsecurely to prevent it from opening while driv-ing.

• Do not drive with the back door open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gases to bedrawn into the vehicle. See “Precautions whenstarting and driving” in the “5. Starting anddriving” section for exhaust gas.

• Do not leave children unattended inside thevehicle. They could unknowingly activateswitches or controls. Unattended childrencould become involved in serious accidents.

• Always be sure that hands and feet are clearof the door frame to avoid injury while closingthe back door.

SPA2437Z

SPA2438Z

BONNET BACK DOOR


OPERATING MANUAL BACK DOORTo open the back door, unlock it and push theopener switch jA . Pull up the back door to open.

The back door can be unlocked by:

• pushing the “UNLOCK” button on the In-telligent Key twice.

• pushing the back door request switch.

• pushing the door handle request switch twice.

• pushing the power door lock switch to the un-lock position.

To close the back door, pull down until it securelylocks.

OPERATING POWER BACK DOOR(where fitted)To operate the powered back door, the selectorlever must be in the P (Park) position.

The powered back door will not operate if the bat-tery voltage is low.

Power back door main switchThe powered back door operation can be turned onor off by the power back door main switch on theinstrument panel.

When the power back door main switch is pushedto the “OFF” position, the power operation is notavailable by the power back door switch on the backdoor and back door opener switch.

SPA2547Z SPA2548Z

Power back door switch — Instrument panel

SPA2462Z

Back door opener switch


Power openWhen the back door is fully closed, the back doorwill fully open automatically by:

• pushing the power back door switch jA on theinstrument panel

• pushing the back door opener switch jB

• pushing the power back door button jC on thekey for more than 1 second

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chimesounds when the back door starts opening.

NOTE

The back door can be opened by the power backdoor switch jA or the back door buttonjC even if the back door is locked. The back doorwill individually unlock and open. Once the backdoor is closed, its lock will align to the vehicle’slock or unlock status.

Power closeWhen the back door is fully opened, the back doorwill fully close automatically by:


• pushing the power back door switch jD on thelower part of the back door

• pushing the back door release button jC on theIntelligent Key for more than 1 second

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chimesounds when the back door starts closing.

Reverse functionThe power back door will reverse immediately if oneof the following actions is performed during poweropen or power close.


• pushing the back door switch jD on the lowerpart of the back door

• pushing the back door button jC on theIntelligent Key.

The outside chime sounds when the back door startsto reverse.

The power back door button jC on theIntelligent Key cannot be operated when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Auto reverse functionThe auto-reverse function enables the back door toautomatically reverse when something is caught inthe back door as it is opening or closing. When thecontrol unit detects an obstacle, the back door willreverse and return to the full open or full close posi-tion.

If a second obstacle is detected, the back doormotion will stop and the drive motor will disengage.The back door will enter the manual mode.

A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the backdoor. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch sensorduring power close, the back door will reverse andreturn to the full open position immediately.

NOTE

If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed, thepower close function will not operate.

SPA2562

Intelligent Key

SPA2440Z

Power back door switch — Back door


WARNING

There is a small distance immediately before theclosed position that cannot be detected. Makesure that all passengers keep their hands, etc.,clear from the back door opening before closingthe back door.

Manual modeIf power operation is not available, the back doorcan be operated manually. Power operation may notbe available if multiple obstacles have been detectedin a single power cycle or if the battery voltage islow. When the power back door main switch is inthe OFF position, the back door can be openedmanually by pushing the back door opener switch.If the power back door opener switch is pushedduring power open or close, the power operationwill be cancelled and the back door can be oper-ated manually.

Safe ModeIf the gas stays of the back door j1 lose pressure,the power back door safe mode is activated. Whenthe safe mode is activated, the back door intermit-tently closes. Then the back door will be pulled tothe closed and latched position by a motor.

The power back door cannot be opened using theswitches at any time in the safe mode.

Do not operate the back door again until it is checkedby a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

CAUTION

• If the power back door does not stay open orif the back door unexpectedly closes at anytime, do not operate the back door. Theremay be a pressure loss in one or both of theback door gas stays. Have the back door in-spected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-shop.

• Do not activate the power back door if one orboth of the back door gas stays are removed.Damage to the back door or power back doormechanisms may occur.

AUTO CLOSUREIf the back door is pulled down to a partly open posi-tion, the back door will pull itself to the closed posi-tion.

Do not apply excessive force when the auto clo-sure is operating. Excessive force applied maycause the mechanism to malfunction.

CAUTION

• The back door will automatically close from apartly open position. To avoid pinching, keephands and fingers away from back door open-ing.

• Do not let children operate the back door.

BACK DOOR RELEASE LEVER(where fitted)If the back door cannot be opened with the doorlock switch due to a discharged battery, follow thesesteps.

1. Remove the cover jA inside of the back doorusing a suitable tool.

2. Move the lever jB as illustrated to open the backdoor.

Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop assoon as possible for repair.

SPA2464Z

SPA1915Z


WARNING

• Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explo-sive under certain conditions. You could beburned or seriously injured if it is misused ormishandled. Always stop the engine and donot smoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refuelling.

• Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap ahalf of a turn, and wait for any hissing soundto stop to prevent fuel from spraying out andpossibly causing personal injury. Then removethe cap.

• Use only a Genuine NISSAN or equivalent fuelfiller cap as a replacement. It has a built-insafety valve needed for proper operation ofthe fuel system and emission control system.An incorrect cap can result in a serious mal-function and possible injury.

OPENING FUEL FILLER LIDTo open the fuel filler lid, push the opener switchlocated below the instrument panel. To lock, closethe fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAPThe fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the capanticlockwise to remove. Tighten the cap clockwiseuntil ratchet clicks, more than twice, after refuelling.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder jA whilerefuelling.

CAUTION

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it awaywith water to avoid paint damage.

MANUAL STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving sothat full attention may be given to vehicle opera-tion.

Tilt or telescopic operationPull the lock lever j1 down and adjust the steeringwheel forward or rearward to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the steeringwheel in place.

Pull the lock lever j2 and adjust the steering wheelup or down to the desired position.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel inplace.

SPA2441Z

SPA2442Z

SPA2443Z

FUEL FILLER LID STEERING WHEEL


ELECTRIC STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving sothat full attention may be given to vehicle opera-tion.

Tilt or telescopic operationMove the lever j1 to adjust the steering wheel up ordown, forward or rearward until the desired positionis achieved.

Entry/Exit functionThe automatic drive positioner system will make thesteering wheel move up automatically when the driv-er’s door is opened with the ignition switch in theLOCK position. This function allows the driver getinto and out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “Automatic drive posi-tioner (where fitted)” later in this section.

WARNING

Adjust the position of all mirrors before driving.Do not adjust the mirror positions while drivingso that full attention may be given to vehicle op-eration.

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORWhile holding the inside rearview mirror, adjust themirror angles until the desired position is achieved.

Manual anti-glare typePull the adjusting lever j1 when the glare from theheadlights of the vehicle behind you obstructs yourvision at night.

Push the adjusting lever j2 during the day for thebest rearward visibility.

Do not attach any accessories or electrical de-vices to or around the inside rearview mirror. Oth-erwise, the Intelligent Key system and remotekeyless entry system may not function properly.

SPA2456AZ SPA2447Z

SPA2143Z

MIRRORS


Automatic anti-glare typeThe inside rearview mirror is designed so that itautomatically changes reflection according to theintensity of the headlights of the vehicle followingyou.

The anti-glare system will be automatically turned onwhen you push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

When the system is turned on, the indicator light jBwill illuminate and excessive glare from the head-lights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced.

Push the switch jA for 3 seconds to make theinside rearview mirror operate normally and the indi-cator light will turn off. Push the switch againfor 3 seconds to turn the system on.

Do not hang any objects on the mirror or applyglass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the sensitivityof the sensor jC , resulting in improper opera-tion.

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS

WARNING

• Never touch the outside rearview mirrorswhile they are in motion. Doing so may pinchyour fingers or damage the mirror.

• Never drive the vehicle with the outside rear-view mirrors folded. This reduces rear viewvisibility and may lead to an accident.

• Objects viewed in the outside mirror arecloser than they appear (where fitted).

• The picture dimensions and distance in theoutside mirrors are not real.

AdjustingThe outside rearview mirror remote control operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-tion.

1. Turn the switch to select the left (L) or right (R)mirror j1 .

2. Adjust each mirror by pushing the switch untilthe desired position is achieved j2 .

Defogging (where fitted)The outside rearview mirrors will be heated whenthe rear window defogger switch is operated.

FoldingRemote control type:

The outside rearview mirror remote control operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posi-tion.

The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold whenthe outside rearview mirror folding switch is pushedin. To unfold, push to the switch again.

CAUTION

Continuously performing the fold/unfold opera-tion of the outside rearview mirror may cause theswitch to stop the operation. To restore theswitch operation, push the switch to the neutralposition before adjusting the mirror position.

SPA2162Z

SPA2309Z

SPA2310Z


VANITY MIRRORTo use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and pull up the cover.

WARNING

• Never drive the vehicle with the parking brakeapplied. The brake will overheat and fail tooperate and will lead to an accident.

• Never release the parking brake from outsidethe vehicle. If the vehicle moves, it will beimpossible to push the brake pedal and willlead to an accident.

• Never use the selector lever in stead of theparking brake. When parking, be sure theparking brake is fully applied.

• Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone inyour vehicle. They could unknowingly releasethe parking brake and inadvertently becomeinvolved in a serious accident.

To apply the parking brake, firmly depress the park-ing brake pedal j1 .

To release the parking brake, depress and hold thefootbrake j2 and then fully depress and release theparking brake pedal j1 .

Before driving, be sure that the brake warning lighthas turned off.

SIC3869Z

SPA2331Z

PARKING BRAKE


The automatic drive positioner system has two fea-tures:

• Entry/exit function

• Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver’s seat andsteering column will automatically move when theautomatic transmission selector lever is in the P(Park) position. This allows the driver to get into andout of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the steer-ing wheel will move up when the driver’s door isopened with the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and the key not inserted in the key port.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return tothe previous positions when the ignition switch ispushed to the ACC position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the previous posi-tions if the seat or steering adjusting switch is oper-ated when the seat is at the exit position.

Activating or cancelling entry/exitfunctionThe selector lever must be in the P (park) positionwith the ignition switch in the “OFF” position afterthe driver’s door is opened.

The entry/exit function can be activated or cancelledby pressing and holding the SET switch for morethan 10 seconds.

The indicator lights on the memory switches (1 and

2) will blink once when the function is cancelled,and the indicator lights will blink twice when thefunction is activated. Note that the indicator lightsmay illuminate after 5 seconds while holding theSET switch. This indicates readiness for linking theIntelligent Key to a stored memory position. Keepthe SET switch pressed for more than 10 secondsto turn on or off the entry/exit function.

The entry/exit function can also be activated or can-celled in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings (where fit-ted). (See “Vehicle information and settings” later inthis section)

Initialising entry/exit functionIf the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will not work thoughthis function was set on before. In such a case, afterconnecting the battery or replacing with a new fuse,open and close the driver’s door more than twotimes after the ignition switch is turned from the ONposition to the LOCK position. The entry/exit func-tion will be activated.

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTIONTwo positions for the driver’s seat, steering columnand outside rearview mirrors can be stored in theautomatic drive positioner memory. Follow theseprocedures to use the memory system.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and out-side rearview mirrors to the desired positions bymanually operating each adjusting switch. Foradditional information, see “Seats” in the“1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section, “Outside rearviewmirrors” earlier in this section and “Steeringwheel” earlier in this section.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, pushthe memory switch (1 or 2).

SPA2445Z

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER(where fitted)


The indicator light for the pushed memory switchwill stay on for approximately 5 seconds afterpushing the switch.

If memory is stored in the same memory switch,the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a storedmemory positionThe Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored memoryposition with the following procedure:

1. After storing a memory position, push the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position.

2. Push the SET switch. The indicator light on thememory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds.

3. Push the memory switch being set.

4. Push the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelli-gent Key while pushing the memory switch. Afterthe indicator light turns off, the Intelligent Key islinked to that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position andpush the “UNLOCK” button on the IntelligentKey. The driver’s seat, steering wheel and outsiderearview mirrors will move to the memorised posi-tion or to the exit position when the entry/exit func-tion is set to active.

Confirming memory storage

• Push the ignition switch to the ON position andpush the SET switch. If the main memory has notbeen stored, the indicator light will come on for

approximately 0.5 second. When the memoryhas stored, the indicator light will stay on forapproximately 5 seconds.

• If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the memory will be cancelled. In this case,reset the desired position using the previous pro-cedure.

• If optional Intelligent Keys are added to your ve-hicle, the memory storage procedure to switch 1or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to astored memory position should be performedagain for each Intelligent Key. For additional In-telligent Key information, see “Keys” earlier inthis section.

Selecting memorised position1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Use one of the following methods to move thedriver’s seat, the outside mirrors and the steer-ing wheel.

• Push the ignition switch to the ON position andpush the memory switch (1 or 2).

• Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s doorwith the ignition switch in the “OFF” position,push the memory switch (1 or 2).

3. The driver’s seat, steering column and outsiderear view mirrors will move to the memorisedposition or to the exit position when the entry/exitfunction is set to active with the indicator lightflashing, and then the light will stay on for ap-proximately 5 seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system will not workor will stop operating under the following conditions:

• When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) (entry/exit function).

• When the vehicle is driven (memory storage).

• When the adjusting switch for the driver’s seatand steering column is turned on while the auto-matic drive positioner is operating.

• When the seat, steering column and outside mir-rors have already been moved to the memorisedposition.

• When no position is stored in the memory switch.

• When the engine is started while moving theautomatic drive positioner.

• When the selector lever is moved from the P(Park) position to any other position. (However,it will not be cancelled while the seat and steer-ing column are returning to the previous posi-tions (entry/exit function).)

• When the driver’s door remains open for morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not inthe ON position.


4 Display screen, heater and air conditioner,and audio systemDisplay screen, heater and air conditioner,and audio system

Safety precautions ................................................... 4-2Centre multi-function control panel........................... 4-2

How to use multi-function controller .................... 4-3Start-up screen (models with navigationsystem)............................................................... 4-4How to read the screen ...................................... 4-4

Vehicle information and settings ............................... 4-5How to use STATUS button................................ 4-5How to use “OFF” brightness control anddisplay ON/OFF button ...................................... 4-5How to use PHONE button................................. 4-5How to use DISP button (where fitted)................ 4-5How to use INFO button..................................... 4-5How to use SETTING button .............................. 4-8

Rear and front-side view monitors (where fitted)....... 4-13Rear view monitor............................................... 4-13Front-side view monitor (where fitted) ................. 4-17Switching the monitor between rear andfront-side view (where fitted)............................... 4-19How to adjust screen.......................................... 4-19

Vents....................................................................... 4-19Centre vents....................................................... 4-19Side vents .......................................................... 4-20Rear vents .......................................................... 4-20

Heater and air conditioner........................................ 4-20Operating tips..................................................... 4-21Automatic air conditioner .................................... 4-22Servicing air conditioner ..................................... 4-24

Audio system........................................................... 4-25Audio operation precautions ............................... 4-25Antenna.............................................................. 4-29AM-FM radio with Compact Disc (CD)changer (Type A)................................................ 4-30FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)changer (Type B)................................................ 4-37Audio control steering switch.............................. 4-40

Auxiliary sockets ...................................................... 4-41AUX settings ...................................................... 4-41

Mobile Entertainment System (MES) (wherefitted)....................................................................... 4-42

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) systemcomponents........................................................ 4-42DVD remote controller and headphone battery .... 4-44Before operating DVD entertainment system ....... 4-45Playing Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) .................... 4-46Care and maintenance........................................ 4-49

Car phone and CB radio.......................................... 4-50

WARNING

• Do not adjust the display controls, heater andair conditioner controls or audio controls whiledriving so that full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

• If you noticed any foreign objects entering thesystem hardware, spilled liquid on the sys-tem, or noticed smoke or fumes coming outfrom the system, or any other unusual opera-tion is observed, stop using the system imme-diately and contact the nearest NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop. Ignoring such condi-tions may lead to an accident, fire or electricshock.

• Do not disassemble or modify this system. Ifyou do, it may lead to an accident, fire, orelectric shock.

• Park the vehicle in a safe location and applythe parking brake to view images on the frontcentre display screen using devicesconnected to the auxiliary sockets.

CAUTION

Do not use the system when the engine is notrunning for extended periods of time to preventbattery discharge.

1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9.For navigation system control buttons (Referto the separately provided Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual.)

3. Multi-function controller (P. 4-3)

4. PHONE button (P. 4-5)

5. CAMERA button (P. 4-13)

10. INFO button (P. 4-5)

11. SETTING button (P. 4-8)

12. OFF brightness control and displayON/OFF button (P. 4-5)

13. STATUS button (P. 4-5)

SAA2228Z

Type A

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CENTRE MULTI-FUNCTIONCONTROL PANEL

4-2 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system

1. DISP — display setting button (P. 4-5, 4-9)

2, 6, 7, 8, 9.For navigation system control buttons (Referto the separately provided Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual.)

3. Multi-function controller (P. 4-3)

4. STATUS — status display button (P. 4-5)

5. OFF brightness control and displayON/OFF button (P. 4-5)

10. INFO button (P. 4-5)

11. SETTING button (P. 4-8)

HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTIONCONTROLLERChoose an item on the display using the main direc-tional buttons j2 , additional directional buttons j5or centre dial j3 , and push the ENTER button j1for operation.

If you push the BACK button j4 before the setup iscompleted, the setup will be cancelled and/or thedisplay will return to the previous screen.

After the setup is completed, push the BACK buttonj4 and return to the previous screen.

For VOICE button j6 functions, refer to the sepa-rately provided Navigation System Owner’s manual.

SAA2267

Type B

SAA2229Z

Type A

SAA2269

Type B (where fitted)

Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4-3

START-UP SCREEN (models withnavigation system)When you push the ignition switch to the ACC orON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning mes-sage is displayed on the screen. When you readand agree with the warning message, push theENTER button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, you will not beable to use the NAVI system.

To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the sepa-rately provided Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO READ THE SCREENVehicle functions are viewed on the centre displayscreen in menus. Whenever a menu selection ismade or menu item is highlighted, different areas onthe screen provide you with important information.See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current screen.

i.e. press SETTING button > choose “Audio”menu item (type A) or “Comfort & Conv.” menuitem (type B).

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that menuscreen (i.e. PTY Category (type A) or Auto Inte-rior Illumination (type B)).

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the multi-function controller may beused to move UP/DOWN on the screen and se-lect more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections availablefor that screen (i.e. 6/10 (type A) or 1/9 (typeB)).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available) about themenu selection currently highlighted (i.e.Select a radio programme type category (type A)or Cabin lighting when unlocking doors (type B)).

SAA2230Z

Type A

SAA1678Z



HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTONTo display the status of the audio, air conditionerand fuel consumption, push the STATUS button.The following information will appear when the STA-TUS button is pushed.

Type A:

Audio → Audio and air conditioner → Audio andnavigation route information → Audio

Type B:

Audio → Audio and air conditioner → Audio andfuel consumption → Audio

HOW TO USE “ OFF”BRIGHTNESS CONTROL ANDDISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTONPush the “ OFF” button to switch the displaybrightness to the daytime mode or the nighttimemode, and to adjust the display brightness using themulti-function controller while the indicator is dis-played at the bottom of the screen.

The display brightness can also be adjusted usingthe brightness UP button (+) or brightness DOWNbutton (−).

Push the “ OFF” button for more than 2 sec-onds to turn the display off. Push the button again toturn the display on.

HOW TO USE PHONE BUTTONFor the details of operating the PHONE button, referto the separately provided Navigation System Own-er’s Manual.

HOW TO USE DISP BUTTON(where fitted)Push the DISP button to show the display settingscreen. For details, see “DISPLAY settings” later inthis section

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTONThe display screen shows vehicle information foryour convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be aguide to determine the condition of the vehicle. Seethe following for details.

Vehicle information display1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.

The screen as illustrated above will appear.

2. Choose an item using the multi-function control-ler and push the ENTER button.

3. After viewing or adjusting the information on thefollowing screens, push the BACK button to re-turn to the previous screen.

SAA2218Z

Type A

SAA1511Z

Type B

VEHICLE INFORMATION ANDSETTINGS


Refer to the separately provided Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual for the following items:

Type A:

• TMC Traffic Info

• Where am I?

• GPS Current Location Info

• Navigation Versions

Type B:

• Fuel economy

• Maintenance

FUEL ECONOMY information(where fitted)The distance to empty, average fuel economy andcurrent fuel economy (shown on the right side bar)will be displayed for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the multi-function controller to highlight the “Reset” key andpush the ENTER button.

*: The unit can be converted between “km/l” or“l/100 km”.

If the “View” key is highlighted with the multi-func-tion controller and the ENTER button is pushed, theaverage fuel consumption history will be displayedin graph form along with the average for the previ-ous Reset-to-Reset period.

The fuel economy information may differ from theinformation displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystaldisplay. This is due to the timing difference in updat-ing the information and does not indicate a malfunc-tion.

MAINTENANCE informationTo set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1 to4, choose an item using the multi-function controllerand push the ENTER button.

You can also set the system to display a message toremind you that the maintenance needs to be per-formed.

The following example shows how to set Reminder1. Use the same steps to set the other maintenanceinformation.

SAA2222Z

SAA2112Z

SAA1676Z


1. Reset the driving distance to the new mainte-nance schedule.

2. Set the interval of the maintenance schedule. Todetermine the recommended maintenance inter-val, refer to the separately provided WarrantyInformation & Maintenance booklet.

3. To display the reminder automatically when theset trip distance is reached, highlight the “Inter-val Reminder” key with the multi-function control-ler and push the ENTER button.

4. To return the display to maintenance informationpush the BACK button.

Type A:

The unit can be converted between “km” and “miles”in the LANGUAGE settings display. (For details,see “How to use SETTING button” later in this sec-tion.)

Type B (where fitted):

The maintenance information display cannot be op-erated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the vehiclein a safe place to see the information.

Reminder:

The reminder will be automatically displayed asshown when both of the following conditions aremet:

• the vehicle is driven the set distance and the igni-tion switch is pushed to the LOCK position.

• the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ONposition the next time that you drive the vehicleafter the set value has been reached.

To return to the previous display after the reminderis displayed, push the BACK button.

The reminder is displayed each time the ignitionswitch is pushed to the ON position until one of thefollowing conditions is met:

• “Reset Distance” is selected.

• “Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.

• the maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1677Z

SAA1611Z


HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTONThe “Settings” screen will appear when pushing theSETTING button.

The following items are available for “Settings”screen.

• Audio

• Clock

• Comfort & Conv. (where fitted)

To show the “Comfort & Conv.” key, push theignition switch to the ON position.

• Display

• Language

• Navigation

• Phone

• Rear Display (where fitted)

• Select units (where fitted)

• Voice Recognition

• Volume and Beeps

Refer to the separately provided Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual for the following items:

• Navigation

• Phone

• Voice Recognition

REAR DISPLAY settings (where fitted)The “Rear Display” screen will appear when push-ing the SETTING button, selecting the “Rear Dis-play” key with the multi-function controller and push-ing the ENTER button.

Rear Display Open:

When this item is turned to ON, the rear displayopens. When the ignition switch is pushed to theACC or ON position, the rear display is flipped downautomatically.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the “OFF”position, the rear display is closed automatically ifON is selected.

The rear display can also be opened or closed usingthe remote controller. (See “Mobile EntertainmentSystem (MES) (where fitted)” later in this section.)

SAA2231Z

Type A

SAA1741Z


SAA2233Z


DISPLAY settingsThe “Display” screen will appear when pushing theSETTING button, selecting “Display” key with themulti-function controller and pushing the ENTERbutton.

Display:

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button andturn the ON indicator off.

When any mode button is pushed with the screenoff, the screen turns on for further operation. Thescreen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after theoperation is finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON posi-tion or push the “ ” button.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Colour:

To adjust the brightness, contrast and backgroundcolour of the screen, select the appropriate “Bright-ness”, “Contrast” or “Background Colour” key andpush the ENTER button.

Then, you can adjust the brightness and the con-trast to “+” or “−” using the multi-function controller.

Switch the background colour to the daytime modeor the night-time mode by pushing the ENTER but-ton.

For the display mode adjustment procedures whilethe rear view or the front-side view monitor (wherefitted) is displayed, see “Rear and front-side viewmonitors (where fitted)” later in this section.

AUDIO settingsThe “Audio” screen will appear when pushing theSETTING button, selecting the “AUDIO” key withthe multi-function controller and pushing the ENTERbutton.

SAA2115Z SAA2232Z

Type A

SAA1515

Type B


Bass/Treble/Balance/Fader:

To adjust the tone quality and speaker sound bal-ance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or“Fader” key and adjust it with the multi-function con-troller.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing andturning the AUDIO knob. (See “AM-FM radio withCompact Disc (CD) changer (Type A)” later in thissection or “FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)changer (Type B)” later in this section.)

Speed Sensitive Volume:

To increased the sound volume according to thevehicle speed, choose the desired effect level from“OFF” (0) to 5.

PTY Category/TA/AF/REG/PTY/TA Volume(where fitted):

See “AM-FM radio with Compact Disc (CD)changer (Type A)” later in this section.

VOLUME AND BEEPS settings (modelswith navigation system)The “Volume and Beeps” screen will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Volumeand Beeps” key with the multi-function controllerand pushing the ENTER button.

Guidance Volume:

To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or softer,select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust it with themulti-function controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice volume byturning the VOLUME control knob while voice guid-ance is being announced.

Guidance Voice:

When this item is turned to “ON”, you will hear voiceguidance in the navigation operation or in other op-erations.

Phone Ringer Vol:

Adjust the ring volume to be louder (+) or quieter(−).

Phone Incoming Vol:

Adjust the phone incoming volume to be louder (+)or quieter (−).

Phone Outgoing Vol:

Adjust the phone outgoing volume to be louder (+)or quieter (−).

Button Beeps:

When this item is turned to “ON”, you will hear abeep sound when you use a button.

PHONE settings (models with navigationsystem)For the details of “Phone” settings, refer to the sepa-rately provided Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

NAVIGATION settingsFor the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to theseparately provided Navigation System Owner’sManual.

SAA2066Z

With navigation system


CLOCK settingsThe “Clock” screen will appear when pushing theSETTING button, selecting the “Clock” key with themulti-function controller and pushing the ENTERbutton.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is alwaysdisplayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly be-cause it is always adjusted by the GPS system(models with navigation system).

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the 24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing perminute or per hour (models with navigation system).

Daylight Saving Time (where fitted):

Choose the setting of the daylight saving time fromON, “OFF” and “AUTO”.

Time Zone (where fitted):

Choose an appropriate time zone from the list.

COMFORT & CONV. settings(where fitted)The “Comfort & Conv.” screen will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Com-fort & Conv.” key with the multi-function controllerand pushing the ENTER button. This key does notappear on the display until the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position.

Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the interior lightswill illuminate under several conditions. (See “Inte-rior lights” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-tion.)

Auto Headlights Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlightshigher (right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay:

Choose the duration of the automatic headlights offtimer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 sec-ond periods.

Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’sdoor is unlocked first after the door unlock opera-tion. When the door handle request switch on thedriver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed tobe unlocked, only the corresponding door is un-locked first. All the doors can be unlocked if thedoor unlock operation is performed again within fiveseconds.

SAA2234Z

Type A

SAA2077Z


SAA2313


When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors willbe unlocked after the door unlock operation is per-formed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, door lock/unlockfunction by pushing the door handle request switchwill be activated.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (where fitted):

When this item is turned to ON, the steering wheelmoves upward for easy exit if the ignition switch is inthe “OFF” position and the driver’s door is opened.After getting into the vehicle and pushing the igni-tion switch to the ACC position, the steering wheelmoves to the previous position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (where fitted):

When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seatmoves backward for easy exit if the ignition switchis in the “OFF” position and the driver’s door isopened. After getting into the vehicle and pushingthe ignition switch to the ACC position, the driver’sseat moves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item, push the ENTER button and choose“YES” if you want to return all settings to default.

LANGUAGE settings (where fitted)The “Language” screen will appear when pushingthe SETTING button, selecting the “Language” keywith the multifunction controller and pushing theENTER button.

To change the language and measurement unit:

1. Select the appropriate language and push theENTER button to turn the item ON.

• English (mile)

• English (km)

• Français

• Deutsch

• Español

• Italiano

• Nederlands

• Português

2. A warning message is displayed. Confirm thecontents of warning. After confirming the mes-sage, select “Yes” key and push the ENTER but-ton.

This warning will not appear when switching from“English (mile)” to “English (km)”.

3. The programme loading screen is displayed, andthe system initiates language setting. Uponcompletion, the start-up screen is automaticallydisplayed.

CAUTION

Do not push the ignition switch when changingthe language as long as the setup is being per-formed. Doing so may cause a system malfunc-tion.

SAA2216Z

SAA2085Z


SELECT UNITS settings (where fitted)The “Select Units” screen will appear when pushingthe SETTING button, selecting the “Select Units”key with the multi-function controller and pushingthe ENTER button.

Metric (l/100 km):

When this item is turned to “ON”, the unit shown onthe screen is set to l/100 km.

Metric (km/l):

When this item is turned to “ON”, the unit shown onthe screen is set to km/l.

REAR VIEW MONITORWhen the selector lever is shifted into the R (Re-verse) position, the monitor display shows view tothe rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver indetecting large stationary objects to help avoid dam-aging the vehicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper and may not detect ob-jects close to the bumper or on the ground.

WARNING

• The rear view camera is a convenience but itis not a substitute for proper reversing. Al-ways turn your head and visually check that itis safe to do so before reversing. Always re-verse slowly.

• Objects viewed in the rear view monitor differfrom actual distance because a wide-anglelens is used. Objects viewed in the rear viewmonitor appear visually opposite, just likeones viewed in the inside and outside rear-view mirrors.

• Make sure that the back door is securelyclosed when reversing.

• Underneath the bumper and the corner areasof the bumper cannot be viewed on the rearview monitor because of its monitoring rangelimitation.

• Do not put anything on the rear view camera.The rear view camera is installed above thenumber plate.

• When washing the vehicle with high-pressurewater, be sure not to spray it around the cam-era. Otherwise, water may enter the cameraunit causing water condensation on the lens,a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

• Do not strike the camera. It is a precision in-strument. Otherwise, it may malfunction orcause damage resulting in a fire or an electricshock.

CAUTION

There is a transparent cover over the cameralens. Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirtor snow from the cover.

How to read displayed linesGuiding lines which indicate the vehicle width anddistances to objects with reference to the bumperline jA are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

SAA1896Z

REAR AND FRONT-SIDE VIEWMONITORS (where fitted)


• Red line j1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)

• Yellow line j2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft)

• Green line j3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft)

• Green line j4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft)

Vehicle width guide lines j5 :

Indicate the vehicle width when reversing.

Predicted course lines j6 :

Indicate the predicted course when reversing. Thepredicted course lines will be displayed on the moni-tor when the selector lever is in the R (Reverse)position and the steering wheel is turned. The pre-dicted course lines will move depending on howmuch the steering wheel is turned and will not bedisplayed while the steering wheel is in the neutralposition.

How to park with predicted course lines

WARNING

• Always turn your head and visually check thatit is safe to park your car before reversing.Always reverse slowly.

• Use the displayed lines as a reference. Thelines are highly affected by the number of oc-cupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road con-dition and road grade.

• If the tyres are replaced with different sizedtyres, the predicted course line may not bedisplayed correctly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road, theremay be a difference between the predictedcourse line and the actual course line.

• If the battery is reconnected, the predictedcourse lines may not be displayed correctly. Ifthis occurs, perform the following proce-dures.

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lockwhile the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road formore than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turned with theignition switch in the ACC position, the pre-dicted course lines may not be displayed cor-rectly.

• The displayed lines will appear slightly off tothe right because the rear view camera is notinstalled in the rear centre of the vehicle.

• The distance guide line and the vehicle widthguide line should be used as a reference onlywhen the vehicle is on a level paved surface.The distance viewed on the monitor is for ref-erence only and may be different than the ac-tual distance between the vehicle and dis-played objects.

• When reversing the vehicle up a hill, objectsviewed in the monitor are further than theyappear. When reversing the vehicle down ahill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer

than they appear. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properly judgedistances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines arewider than the actual width and course.


1. Visually check that the parking space is safe be-fore parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on thescreen jA as illustrated when the selector leveris moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly reverse the vehicle adjusting the steeringwheel so that the predicted course lines jB enterthe parking space jC .

4. Manoeuvre the steering wheel to make the ve-hicle width guide lines jD parallel to the parkingspace jC while referring to the predicted courselines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space com-pletely, move the selector lever to the P (Park)position and apply the parking brake.

Difference between predicted and actualdistancesThe distance guide line and the vehicle width guideline should be used as a reference only when thevehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distanceviewed on the monitor is for reference only and maybe different from the actual distance between thevehicle and displayed objects.

SAA1897 SAA1898


Reversing on a steep uphill:

When reversing the vehicle up a hill, the distanceguide lines and the vehicle width guide lines areshown closer than the actual distance. For example,the display shows 1.0 m (3 ft) to the place jA , butthe actual 1.0 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the placejB . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in themonitor further than it appears.

Reversing on a steep downhill:

When reversing the vehicle down a hill, the distanceguide lines and the vehicle width guide lines areshown further than the actual distance. For example,the display shows 1.0 m (3 ft) to the place jA , butthe actual 1.0 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the placejB . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in themonitor closer than it appears.

Reversing near a projecting object:

The predicted course lines jA do not touch theobject in the display. However, the vehicle may hitthe object if it projects over the actual reversingcourse.

SAA1978 SAA1979 SAA1923


Reversing behind a projecting object:

The position jC is shown further than the positionjB in the display. However, the position jC is actu-ally at the same distance as the position jA . Thevehicle may hit the object when reversing to theposition jA if the object projects over the actualreversing course.

Operating tips

• When the selector lever is shifted to the R (Re-verse) position, the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the rear view monitor mode. How-ever, the radio can be heard.

• It may take some time until the rear view monitoris displayed after the selector lever has beenshifted to R from another position or to anotherposition from R. Objects may be distorted mo-mentarily until the rear view monitor screen isdisplayed completely.

• When the temperature is extremely high or low,the screen may not clearly display objects. Thisis not a malfunction.

• When strong light directly enters the camera,objects may not be displayed clearly. This is nota malfunction.

• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected light fromthe bumper. This is not a malfunction.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.This is not a malfunction.

• The colours of objects on the rear view monitormay differ somewhat from those of the actualobject.

• Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night. This is not a malfunction.

• If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, therear view monitor may not clearly display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to cleanthe camera. This will cause discolouration. Toclean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampenedwith diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipewith a dry cloth.

• Do not damage the camera as the monitor screenmay be adversely affected.

• Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe offany wax with a clean cloth dampened with milddetergent diluted with water.

FRONT-SIDE VIEW MONITOR(where fitted)The front-side view monitor operates when the igni-tion switch is in the ACC or ON position. Push theCAMERA button on the control panel to show theview around and ahead of the passenger’s side frontwheel in the front display. The front-side view cam-era adopts an infrared supplemental light, and thiscan also show the view in the display at night.

This system is designed as an aid to the driver withparallel parking or when passing another vehicle ona narrow road.

The front-side view monitor view will be displayedfor about 3 minutes after the CAMERA button ispushed. In 3 minutes, the display will return to theprevious screen. To extend the display time, pushthe CAMERA button again. To return to the previousdisplay mode during this 3-minute-period, push theCAMERA button again.

The front-side view monitor view will not be dis-played when the vehicle speed is above 20 km/h

SAA1980


(13 MPH). The displayed front-side view will auto-matically return to the previous screen.

WARNING

• The front-side view monitor is an assist de-vice, not a substitute for proper vehicle op-eration. Always see and check that it is safe todo so before operating the vehicle. Then startor turn the vehicle slowly.

• The front-side view camera is installed in thepassenger’s side outside mirror. Do not usethe front-side view monitor with the outsidemirror in the stored position.

• Objects viewed in the front-side view monitordiffer from actual distance.

• When washing the vehicle with high-pressurewater, be sure not to spray it around the cam-era. Otherwise, water may enter the cameraunit causing water condensation on the lens,a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

• Do not strike the camera. It is a precision in-strument. Otherwise, it may malfunction orcause damage resulting in a fire or an electricshock.

*: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, theview on the monitor will be opposite.

How to read the displayed linesLines are indicated as reference in the display tohelp the driver to sense the vehicle width, etc. Thefront-of-vehicle line j1 shows the position wherethe front part of the vehicle is. The side-of-vehicleline j2 shows the vehicle width including the pas-senger’s side outside mirror.

The extension j3 of both front j1 and side j2 linesis shown in a green dotted line.

CAUTION

• All the lines displayed are reference. Alwaysbe sure to actually see and check that it issafe around the vehicle. The displayed posi-tion of the lines will be affected by the vehicleconditions, such as the number of occupants,fuel level or vehicle position.

• The turn signal light may overlap with the side-of-vehicle line in the display. This is not a mal-function.

Operating tips

• The front-side view monitor system remains onfor about 3 minutes after the CAMERA button ispushed, unless the display is switched to theother mode.

• When the temperature is extremely high or low,the display may not clearly display objects. Thisis not a malfunction.

• When strong light directly enters the camera orthe turn signal/hazard indicator lights are oper-ated in a dark place or at night, objects may notbe displayed clearly.

• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the dis-play. This is due to strong reflected light from thefender, etc. This is not a malfunction.

• The display may flicker under fluorescent light.This is not a malfunction.

• The colours of objects on the front-side viewmonitor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object, as the front-side view monitor cam-era is an infrared one.

• Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

• The supplemental infrared light (LED) is not vis-ible. This is not a malfunction.

SAA2235Z

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models*


• The display may become darker on a rainy night,as the supplemental light causes a peculiar re-flection. This is not a malfunction.

• If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, thefront-side view monitor may not clearly displayobjects. Clean the camera.

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to cleanthe camera. This will cause discolouration. Toclean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampenedwith diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipewith a dry cloth.

• Do not damage the camera as the monitor dis-play may be adversely affected.

• Do not use body wax on the camera lens. Wipeoff any wax with a clean cloth dampened withmild detergent diluted with water.

SWITCHING THE MONITORBETWEEN REAR AND FRONT-SIDEVIEW (where fitted)When the selector lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-tion, you can switch the monitor between rear andfront-side view.

The following operations will enable you to switchthe monitor.

• Shift the selector lever into the R position to dis-play the rear view, then push the CAMERA but-ton to switch to the front-side view.

• Push the CAMERA button to display the front-side view, then shift the selector lever into the Rposition to switch to the rear view.

Each time you push the CAMERA button, the moni-tor switches between the rear and front-side view.

As long as the selector lever is in the R position, thefront-side view remains displayed even when 3 min-utes have passed since activation of the front-sideview.

Shifting the selector lever out of the R position, themonitor will automatically switch to the front-sideview monitor and turn off in 3 minutes.

HOW TO ADJUST SCREENTo adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,Colour, Contrast and Black Level of the rear viewmonitor, push the SETTING button with the rearview or front-side view monitor on, select the itemkey and adjust the level using the multi-function con-troller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Colour, Contrastand Black Level of the rear view or front-side viewmonitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure theparking brake is firmly applied and the engine is notrunning.

CENTRE VENTSOpen/close the vents by moving the control to ei-ther direction.

: This symbol indicates that the vents areclosed. Moving the side control to this di-rection will close the vents.

: This symbol indicates that the vents areopen. Moving the side control to this di-rection will open the vents.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by movingthe centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de-sired position is achieved.

SAA1991Z

Centre

VENTS


SIDE VENTSOpen/close the vents by moving the control to ei-ther direction.

: This symbol indicates that the vents areclosed. Moving the side control to this di-rection will close the vents.

: This symbol indicates that the vents areopen. Moving the side control to this di-rection will open the vents.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by movingthe centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de-sired position is achieved.

REAR VENTSAdjust the air flow direction of the vents by movingthe centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de-sired position is achieved.

WARNING

• The heater and air conditioner operate onlywhen the engine is running.

• Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone inthe vehicle. Pets should not be left alone ei-ther. They could unknowingly activateswitches or controls and inadvertentlybecome involved in a serious accident andinjure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tem-peratures in a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to cause severe or pos-sibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

• Do not use the recirculation mode for longperiods as it may cause the interior air to be-come stale and the windows to fog up.

• Do not adjust the heating and air conditioningcontrols while driving so that full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

The heater and air conditioner operate when theengine is running. The air blower will operate even ifthe engine is turned off and the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

SAA1990Z

Side

SAA1066Z

Rear

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER


*: For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, thescreen layout will be the opposite.

When the STATUS button is pushed, the air condi-tioner status screen will appear. (See “How to useSTATUS button” earlier in this section.)

OPERATING TIPSWhen the engine coolant temperature and outsideair temperature are low, the air flow from the footoutlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 sec-onds. However, this is not a malfunction. After thecoolant temperature warms up, the air flow from thefoot outlets will operate normally.

The sensors jA and jB located on the instrument

panel help maintain a constant temperature. Do notput anything on or around the sensors.

SAA2265Z

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models*

SAA1989Z

SAA2236Z


1. “AUTO” automatic operation button/Temperature control dial (driver side)

2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

3. “ ” intake air control button

4. “ ” fan speed control dial/“OFF” button

5. “ ” upper vent system button

6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/Temperature control dial (passenger side)

7. “ ” front defogger button

8. “ ” rear window defogger button (See“Defogger switch” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.)

9. “MODE” manual air flow control button

The switch layout in the illustration is for the Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models. For the Right-Hand Drive(RHD) models, the switch layout will be the oppo-site.

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER

Automatic operation (AUTO)The AUTO mode may be used year-round as thesystem automatically controls constant temperature,air flow distribution and fan speed after the desiredtemperature is set manually.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push the“OFF” button.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the “AUTO” button.(The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and“AUTO” will appear on the display.)

2. If the A/C indicator light does not illuminate, pushthe “A/C” button.(The A/C indicator light will illuminate.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial (driver’s side)to set the desired temperature.

• When the DUAL indicator light is turned off:

– Turning the driver’s side temperature controldial changes both the driver’s and front pas-senger’s side temperature.

– Turning the passenger’s side temperaturecontrol dial changes only the front passen-ger’s side temperature. (The DUAL indicatorlight will illuminate and “DUAL” will appear onthe display.)

• To set separate desired temperatures for thedriver and front passenger, push the “DUAL”button, the indicator light illuminates, and thenturn the corresponding temperature control dial.

• To cancel the separate temperature setting, pushthe “DUAL” button, the indicator light turns off,and the driver’s side temperature setting will beapplied to both the driver’s and front passen-ger’s sides.

4. Push and hold the intake air control “ ” but-ton for more than 2 seconds to set the automaticcontrol between the air recirculation and outsideair circulation modes.

When setting the automatic control mode, theindicator lights will blink twice indicating that thesystem is in the automatic control mode.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents inhot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly.This does not indicate a malfunction.

SAA1849Z


Heating (A/C off):

1. Push the “AUTO” button.(The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and“AUTO” will appear on the display.)

2. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the“A/C” button.(The A/C indicator light will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the de-sired temperature.

• When the DUAL indicator light is turned off:

– Turning the driver’s side temperature controldial changes both the driver’s and front pas-senger’s side temperature.

– Turning the passenger’s side temperaturecontrol dial changes only the front passen-ger’s side temperature. (The DUAL indicatorlight will illuminate and “DUAL” will appear onthe display.)

• To set separate desired temperatures for thedriver and front passenger, push the “DUAL”button, the indicator light illuminates, and thenturn the corresponding temperature control dial.

• To cancel the separate temperature setting, pushthe “DUAL” button, the indicator light turns off,and the driver’s side temperature setting will beapplied to both the driver’s and front passen-ger’s sides.

4. Push and hold the intake air control “ ” but-ton for more than 2 seconds to set the automaticcontrol between the air recirculation and outsideair circulation modes.

When setting the automatic control mode, theindicator lights will blink twice indicating that thesystem is in the automatic control mode.

• Do not set the temperature lower than the out-side air temperature. Doing so may cause thetemperature not to be controlled properly.

• If the windows fog up, use dehumidified heatinginstead of the A/C off heating.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the front defogger “ ” button. (The indi-cator light will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the de-sired temperature.

• To remove frost from the outside surface of thewindscreen quickly, set the temperature controland fan speed control to their maximum position.

• After the windscreen is cleared, push the“AUTO” button to set to the automatic mode.

• When the front defogger “ ” button ispushed, the air conditioner will automatically turnon when the outside air temperature is above−5°C (23°F) to defog the windscreen. The airrecirculation mode will automatically turn off. Theoutside air circulation mode will be selected toimprove the defogging performance.

Manual operationThe manual mode can be used to control the heaterand air conditioner to your desired settings.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push the“OFF” button.

Fan speed control:

Turn the fan speed control dial “ ” to adjust thefan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to change the fan speed tothe automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Push the “MODE” button to change the air flowmode.

: Air flows from the centre and side vents.: Air flows from the centre and side vents, and

foot outlets.: Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.: Air flows from the defogger and foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the desiredtemperature.

The available temperature range is between:

– type A: 16°C (65°F) and 30°C (86°F)

– type B (where fitted): 18°C (65°F) and 32°C(89°F)


Air recirculation:

Push the intake air control “ ” button to changethe air circulation mode.

When the indicator light on the intake air control“ ” button is illuminated, the flowing air is recir-culated inside the vehicle.

Outside air circulation:

Push the intake air control “ ” button to drawoutside air into the passenger compartment. Theindicator light on the “ ” side will turn off.

Automatic intake air control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlledautomatically. To manually control the intake air,push the intake air control “ ” button.

Push and hold the intake air control “ ” buttonfor more than 2 seconds to set the automatic con-trol between the air recirculation and outside air cir-culation modes.

When setting the automatic control mode, the indi-cator lights will blink twice indicating that the systemis in the automatic control mode.

Upper vent systemWhen the “ ” upper vent button is pushed, theair flow against the driver’s or passenger’s upperbody becomes gentle. The indicator light on the but-ton will come on.

In this mode, air from the centre vents flows both

straight and upward in order to control the cabintemperature without blowing air directly on the oc-cupants.

If you want strong air flow against your upper body,push the “ ” button to turn the indicator light off.

To turn system offPush the OFF button.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrigerantunder high pressure. To avoid personal injury,any air conditioner service should be done onlyby an experienced technician with the properequipment.

The air conditioner system in your vehicle is chargedwith a refrigerant designed with the environment inmind.

NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM

This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozonelayer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-quired when servicing your vehicle’s air conditioner.Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will causesevere damage to the air conditioner system. (See“Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” inthe “9. Technical information” section.)

A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be ableto service your environmentally friendly air condi-tioner system.

Air conditioner filterThe air conditioning system is equipped with a filterwhich collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sureair conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-ciently, replace the filter in accordance with theseparately provided Warranty Information & Mainte-nance booklet. To replace the filter, contact aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreasessignificantly or if windows fog up easily when oper-ating the heater or air conditioner.


AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

Do not adjust the audio system while driving sothat full attention may be given to vehicle opera-tion.

Radio

• Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

• Using a mobile phone in or near the vehicle mayinfluence radio reception quality.

Compact Disc (CD) player

• During cold weather or rainy days, the playermay malfunction due to the humidity. If this oc-curs, remove the CD from CD player and dehu-midify or ventilate the player completely.

• The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

• The CD player sometimes may not function whenthe passenger compartment temperature is ex-tremely high. Lower the temperature before use.

• Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

• CDs that are of poor quality, or are dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that havepin holes may not work properly.

• The following CDs may not work properly.

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

• Do not use the following CDs as they may causethe CD player to malfunction.

– 8 cm (3.1 in) discs

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched or have un-usual edges.

• This audio system can only play prerecordedCDs. It has no capabilities to record or burnCDs.

• If the CD cannot be played, one of the followingmessages will be displayed.

Check disc:

– Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (thelabel side is facing up, etc.).

– Confirm that the CD is not bent or warpedand it is free of scratches.

Push eject:

This is a malfunction due to the temperature in-side the player is too high. Remove the CD bypushing the EJECT button, and after a short timereinsert the CD. The CD can be played when thetemperature of the player returns to normal.

Unplayable:

The file is unplayable in this audio system (onlyMP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMATerms:

• MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Ex-perts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most wellknown compressed digital audio file format. Thisformat allows for near “CD quality” sound, but ata fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3conversion of an audio track from CD can re-duce the file size by approximately 10:1 ratio(Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 com-pression removes the redundant and irrelevantparts of a sound signal that the human eardoesn’t hear.

• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is acompressed audio format created by Microsoftas an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offersgreater file compression than the MP3 codec,enabling storage of more digital audio tracks inthe same amount of space when compared toMP3s at the same level of quality.

• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bitsper second used by a digital music files. The sizeand quality of a compressed digital audio file isdetermined by the bit rate used when encodingthe file.

AUDIO SYSTEM


• Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency isthe rate at which the samples of a signal are con-verted from analog to digital (A/D conversion)per second.

• Multisession — Multisession is one of the meth-ods for writing data to media. Writing data onceto the media is called a single session, and writ-ing more than once is called a multisession.

• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the partof the encoded MP3 or WMA file that containsinformation about the digital music file such assong title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate,track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information isdisplayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line onthe display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are registeredtrademarks and/or trademarks of Microsoft Cor-poration in the United States of America and/orother countries.

A. Root folder

B. Folder

C. MP3 or WMA

Playback order:

Music playback order of the CD with MP3 or WMAis as illustrated above.

• The folder names of folders not containing MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display.

• If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “RootFolder” is displayed.

• The playback order is the order in which the fileswere written by the writing software, so the filesmight not play in the desired order.

NAA984


Specification chart: Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Displayablecharacter codes*4

Type A02: ISO-8859-1

Type B (where fitted)01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03:UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM BigEndian), 04: UNICODE(UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06:UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOMLittle Endian)

*4 Available codes depend on what kind of media, ver-sions and information are going to be displayed.

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.* Files saved using the Live File System Component (on a Windows Vista-

based computer) are not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3 Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Samplingfrequency

8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*3

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Samplingfrequency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*3

Tag information(Song title and Artist name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels Type AFolder levels: 8, Folders and files: 512

Type B (where fitted)Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including route folder), Files: 999 (Max. 255files for one folder)

Text character number limitation Type A64 characters

Type B (where fitted)128 characters

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied toVBR.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) beforeusing the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data)will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codesand number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting ofMP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalisation process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next songwhen playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play isprohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in thedesired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in thedesired order.


ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rear win-dow.

CAUTION

• Do not place metallic film near the rear win-dow. Do not attach any metal items to therear window. This may cause poor receptionand/or noise.

• When cleaning the inside of the rear window,be careful not to scratch or damage the rearwindow antenna. Lightly wipe along the an-tenna with a dampened soft cloth.

Roof antennaRemoving the antenna:

The antenna can be removed if necessary.

Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by turn-ing anticlockwise.

To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwiseand tighten.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, besure to remove the antenna under the followingconditions.

• The vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

• The vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling.

• The vehicle is covered with a car cover.

SAA2102Z


1. CD EJECT button

2. ON·OFF button/VOLUME control knob

3. Radio memory and CD selector buttons

4. Radio tuning/MP3·WMA folder selector/AUDIO control knob

5. CD LOAD button

6. Radio band select button

7. REW button/SEEK/TRACK button

8. FF button/SEEK/TRACK button

9. DISC·AUX button

10. MIX·RPT button

11. LIST button

12. TA button

AM-FM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) CHANGER (Type A)

Audio main operationThe audio system operates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position.

POWER ON·OFF:

To turn on the audio system, push the ON·OFF but-ton.

The system will turn on in the mode (radio or CD)which was used immediately before the system wasturned off.

Push the FM·AM (radio) band select button orDISC·AUX button to turn it on directly.

To turn off the audio system, push the ON·OFF but-ton.

Volume control:

To control the volume, turn the VOLUME controlknob.

• Turn the knob clockwise to make the soundlouder.

• Turn the knob anticlockwise to make the soundquieter.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fader, pushthe AUDIO control knob. When the display showsthe setting you want to change (Bass, Treble, Bal-ance or Fader), turn the AUDIO control knob to set

SAA2237


the desired setting. For the other setting methods,see “How to use SETTING button” earlier in thissection.

AM-FM radio operationThe audio system operates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position.

Radio band select button:

When the radio band select button is pushed whilethe audio system is off, the audio system will turn onand the radio will turn on at the broadcasting stationlast played.

If another audio source is playing when the radioband select button is pushed, the audio source willautomatically turn off and the broadcasting stationlast played will turn on.

To change the radio bands, push the radio bandselect button until the desired band appears.

FM → AM → FM

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radiowill automatically change from stereo to monauralreception.

TUNE (Tuning) knob:

When adjusting the broadcasting station frequencymanually, turn the TUNE knob until the desired fre-quency is tuned in.

SEEK button:

When adjusting the broadcasting station frequencyautomatically, push the or button. Whenthe system detects a broadcasting station, it willstop at the station.

j1 to j6 Radio memory buttons:

6 stations can be stored for both the FM or AMbands.

To store the station frequency manually:

1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre-quency using the SEEK function, or using theTUNE knob.

2. Push and hold a radio memory button j1 to j6until a beep sounds. (The radio mutes when thememory button is pushed.)

3. The sound will resume, and memorising is nowcomplete.

4. Perform steps 1 to 3 for all other memory but-tons.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audio

fuse blows, the radio memory will be erased. Insuch a case, reset the desired stations.

List button:

Push the button repeatedly and the list modewill change as follows:

List mode → Preset mode → List mode

1. Select either the list or preset mode with thebutton.

2. Operate the multi-function controller to move tothe next or previous radio station from the listmode or the preset mode.

In the preset mode, only the 6 radio stations that arestored in the preset buttons can be chosen. How-ever, in the list mode, up to 50 radio stations withthe strongest signal can be stored and are availablefor reception in either band.

• While in the list mode and when the buttonis pushed for more than 2 seconds, the radiosearches for the radio stations with the strongestsignal and stores them in the list during radioreception. It may take some time to update thelist.

• When the received radio station is not compat-ible with RDS, the frequency of the station ap-pears at the end of the station information, in-stead of the station name.

SAA2238Z


Radio data system (RDS)Alternative Frequency (AF):

The AF function operates in the FM (radio) mode.

The AF function operates in the FM mode.

To activate this mode, push the SETTING buttonand select the “Audio” key, and push the ENTERbutton to display the audio setting screen. Selectthe “AF” key with the multi-function controller. AFwill toggle between ON and “OFF” each time theENTER button is pushed.

The AF icon will be displayed when the AF mode ison.

The following functions operate when the AF modeis on:

• Automatic switching function

This function compares the strengths of the sig-nals of the stations on the AF list and selects thestation with the optimum reception conditions.

• Programme Information (PI) search

Programme Information (PI) search begins auto-matically if no suitable station is found with theabove automatic switching function. The PIsearch function checks each RDS station withthe same PI code. During this time the sound ismuted and “SEARCHING” is displayed. The PIsearch operation stops when a suitable station isfound. If no station is found once all the frequen-cies have been searched, the radio returns tothe previous frequency.

• Enhanced Other Network (EON) data update(This function also operates when the AFmode is off.)

When EON data is being received, this enablesautomatic retuning of other preset stations onthe same network. Also, network linked servicescan be used.

RDS functions:

• Programme Service (PS) function (stationname display function)

When an RDS station is tuned in with seek ormanual tuning, the RDS data is received and thePS name is displayed immediately.

• Emergency broadcast interrupt function(ALARM INTERRUPTION — EBU SPEC FORINFO)

When the radio receives PTY code 31 (an emer-gency broadcast code), the sound is interrupted,the emergency broadcast is heard, and “PTY31ALARM” is displayed. The volume level at thistime is the same as that for traffic announce-ments. Once the emergency broadcast is fin-ished, the unit immediately returns to the previ-ous source.

• REG (Regional) mode

Some local radio stations are linked together ac-cording to their region because they only offerlimited coverage due to their limited number oftransmitters. If the signal from one station be-

comes weak while you are driving around, RDSmode can switch to another local station in theregion with a stronger signal.

When the REG mode is activated in the FM bandand the radio receiver is tuned to a local radiostation, it will keep receiving this radio stationwithout switching to another local station.

To activate this mode, push the SETTING buttonand select the “Audio” key, and then push theENTER button to display the audio settingscreen. Select the “REG” key with the multi-function controller. REG will toggle between ONand “OFF” each time the ENTER button topushed. The REG icon will be displayed whenthe REG mode is on.

Traffic Announcement (TA):

The TA function operates in the FM and CD modes.

To activate this mode, push the SETTING buttonand select the “Audio” key, and then push theENTER button to display the audio setting screen.Select the “TA” key with the multi-function control-ler. TA will toggle between ON and “OFF” eachtime the ENTER button is pushed. The TA icon willbe displayed when the TA mode is on.

• The TA mode is also selected when the TA but-ton is pushed.

• The TA mode operates regardless of whetherthe AF mode is on or off.


The following functions operate when the TA modeis on:

• Traffic announcement interrupt function

When a traffic announcement is received, theannouncement is tuned in and the volume in-creases to the set level. “TRAFFIC INFO” is dis-played.

Once the traffic announcement is finished, the unitreturns to the source that was set before the trafficannouncement started, and the volume returns tothe previous level. For EON stations, the radio isinterrupted by another EON station with traffic an-nouncements.

The traffic announcement interrupt mode is can-celled if the TA button is pushed during a trafficannouncement. The TA mode returned to the stand-by mode.

• Volume level for traffic announcements

The volume for traffic announcements can be setin the audio settings menu. (See “Audio volumemode” later in this section.)

Programme type (PTY):

This function operates in any mode except the AMmode.

The PTY standby mode is selected either when thePTY ON mode is activated in the PTY category set-ting menu or the PTY button is pressed to the ONposition. The PTY indicator will appear on the dis-play.

• PTY category mode:

To set up a preferred programme type performthe following procedure:

1. Push the SETTING button.

2. Use the multi-function controller to select the“Audio” key then push the ENTER button.

3. Use the multi-function control to select the “PTYCategory” key then push the ENTER button.

4. Select a preferred programme type (“News”,“Sports”, “Varied”, “Pop M” or “Classics”) thenpush the ENTER button to confirm.

5. Select the “PTY” key for the ON position. PTYwill toggle between ON and “OFF” each time theENTER button is pushed.

To return to the normal audio screen after adjust-ment, push the BACK button three times or presseither the DISC·AUX or FM·AM button once.

• PTY standby mode

– The PTY standby mode can be activated in theFM, CD, DVD and AUX modes.

– When the PTY standby mode is switched off,the PTY indicator disappears from the display.

• PTY interruption mode

– A PTY interruption will be announced and thePTY station name will be displayed, when theradio detects the same PTY code between PTYstandby mode and the tuned station or EON sta-tions. The display will then change to the nameof the interrupting PTY station and the volume

will adjust to the set level. For details about PTYvolume settings, see “Audio volume mode” laterin this section.

– When the TA button is pushed during a PTYmode interruption, the radio returns to the previ-ous source. However, the PTY interruptionstandby mode remains.

– When either the FM·AM or DISC·AUX button ispushed during a PTY interruption, the audio unitchanges to the next source. However, the PTYinterruption standby mode remains.

Auto retune:

In the CD mode, if the last tuned station does notbroadcast RDS/EON data, the radio is automati-cally tuned to a station providing RDS/EON data.

When the unit is returned to the radio mode, theprevious station is selected.

Auto tuning is performed in the following cases:

• When no RDS data is received for over 25 sec-onds when the AF mode is on and the TA modeis off.

• When a traffic announcement interruption sta-tion cannot be received for over 25 secondswhen the AF mode is off and the TA mode is on.

• When a traffic announcement interruption RDSstation cannot be received for over 25 secondswhen both the AF and TA modes are on.


Audio volume mode:

To configure the PTY/TA volume settings, performthe following procedure:

1. Push the SETTING button.

2. Select the “Audio” key with the multi-functioncontroller then push the ENTER button.

3. Select the “PTY/TA Volume” key then push theENTER button.

4. Adjust the volume to be louder (+) or quieter (−).

5. Push the ENTER button to confirm your selec-tion.

In order to return to the normal audio screen, pushthe BACK button twice or push either the DISC·AUXor FM·AM button once.

NOTE

Increasing the speed volume setting results inthe audio volume increasing more rapidly withvehicle speed. (See “How to use SETTINGbutton” earlier in this section.)

Compact Disc (CD) changer operationThe audio system operates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

• Do not force the compact disc into the slot.This could damage the player.

• Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.

LOAD button:

You can load and store up to 6 CDs in the CDchanger.

When the LOAD button is pushed, the CD loadingslot will open and the loading position will be dis-played.

Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facingup. The CD will be guided automatically into the slotand will start playing. If another audio source is al-ready playing, it will automatically turn off and theCD will start playing.

To load a CD in the CD changer:

1. Push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD selectbuttons j1 to j6 . If no slot is selected, the CDchanger will automatically select a slot which isavailable.

3. Insert a CD into the slot.

To load 6 CDs in the CD changer in succession,push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed while theaudio system is off and CDs are loaded, the audiosystem will turn on and a CD will start playing.

If another audio source is playing when theDISC·AUX button is pushed with CDs loaded, theaudio source will automatically turn off and a CD willstart playing.

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed while a CDis loaded and a medium is played using the auxiliarysockets or DVD player (where fitted), you can toggleback and forth between CD and medium.

Audio text:

To display the CD text on the screen (text pro-grammed CD only), select the “Text” key on thescreen while a CD is being played using the multi-function controller. The following CD text will be dis-played on the screen.

(CD)

• Disc title

SAA2238Z


• Track title

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

• Folder title

• File title

• Song title

• Album title

• Artist

Forward/AutomaticProgramme Search forwardRewind/AutomaticProgramme Search rewind:

When the (Rewind) or (Forward) but-ton is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a CDis being played, the CD will play while forwarding orrewinding. When the button is released, the CD willreturn to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a CD is being played, thenext track or the beginning of the current track onthe CD will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used toselect tracks when the CD play mode screen isshown on the display. (“CD” will be indicated on theheader of the screen.)

j1 to j6 CD select buttons:

To change to another CD already loaded in the CDchanger, push the corresponding CD select j1 toj6 button or choose a CD displayed on the screenusing the multi-function controller.

MIX·RPT button:

To change the play mode, push the buttonrepeatedly and the mode changes as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 TRK RPT →ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → ALL DISC RPTALL DISC RPT: All tracks of all the CDs will be

played in a continuous and se-quential order.

1 DISC RPT: The CD player repeats the cur-rently playing disc.

1 TRK RPT: The CD player plays the current trackcontinuously.

ALL DISC MIX: All tracks of all CDs will be playedin a continuous but random order.

1 DISC MIX: The CD player plays all the tracksof the current disc in a random or-der.

MP3/WMA play mode:

If a CD is inserted in the CD changer and it containsMP3/WMA files with text data (e.g. root folder name,sub folder name, song title, artist’s name) then therelevant text data will be displayed.

To navigate for the next folder or within a folder, youcan either:

– use the multi-function controller

– turn the MP3·WMA folder selector

– use the tuning switch on the steering audio con-trol switch

then push the ENTER button to access the sub-

folder. A new screen will then show MP3/WMAfiles or other subfolders. To return to the previousfolder push the BACK button.

While playing the CD with recorded MP3/WMAfiles, pushing the button repeatedly will changethe playing mode as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT→ 1 TRK RPT → ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX →1 FOLDER MIX → ALL DISC RPTALL DISC RPT: All tracks of all CDs will be

played in a continuous and se-quential order.

1 DISC RPT: The CD player repeats the cur-rently playing disc.

1 FOLDER RPT: The CD player plays all theMP3/WMA files of the currentfolder continuously.

1 TRK RPT: The CD player plays the current trackcontinuously.

ALL DISC MIX: All tracks of all CDs will be playedin a continuous but random order.

1 DISC MIX: The CD player plays all the tracksof the current disc in a random or-der.

1 FOLDER MIX: The CD player plays all theMP3/WMA files of the currentfolder in a random order.


CD EJECT button:

To eject a CD, push the CD EJECT button forless than 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the CDs, push the CD EJECT but-ton for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while a CD is beingplayed, the CD will come out and the system willturn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will bepulled back into the slot to protect it.

1. CD EJECT button

2. ON·OFF button/VOLUME control knob

3. Radio memory and CD selector buttons

4. Radio tuning / MP3·WMA folder selector /AUDIO control knob

5. CD LOAD button

6. AUTO.P button

7. AM·FM band select button

8. Radio SCAN (tuning)/CD RPT (Repeat) playbutton

9. DISC button

10. REW (rewind) button/SEEK button

SAA2127


11. AUX button

12. FF (fast forward) button/TRACK button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) CHANGER (Type B)

Audio main operationThe audio system operates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position.

POWER ON·OFF:

To turn on the audio system, push the ON·OFF but-ton.

• The system will turn on in the mode (radio orCD) which was used immediately before the sys-tem was turned off.

• If there are no CDs loaded, the radio will beturned on.

Push the AM·FM button or DISC button on the cen-tre multi-function control panel to turn each systemon directly.

To turn off the audio system, push the ON·OFF but-ton.

Volume control:

To control the volume, turn the VOLUME controlknob.

• Turn the knob clockwise to make the soundlouder.

• Turn the knob anticlockwise to make the soundquieter.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push theAUDIO control knob. When the display shows thesetting you want to change (Bass, Treble, Balanceor Fade), turn the AUDIO control knob to set thedesired setting. For the other setting methods, see“How to use SETTING button” earlier in this sec-tion.

FM-AM radio operationThe audio system operates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position.

AM·FM band select button:

When the AM·FM band select button is pushed whilethe audio system is off, the audio system will turn onand the radio will turn on at the broadcasting stationlast played.

If another audio source is playing when the AM·FMbutton is pushed, the audio source will automaticallyturn off and the broadcasting station last played willturn on.

Push the AM·FM button to change the band as fol-lows:

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radiowill automatically change from stereo to monauralreception.

TUNE (Tuning) knob:

When adjusting the broadcasting station frequencymanually, turn the TUNE knob until the desired fre-quency is tuned in.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When adjusting the broadcasting station frequencyautomatically, push the or button. Whenthe system detects a broadcasting station, it willstop at the station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low tohigh frequencies and stops at each broadcastingstation for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again dur-ing this 5 seconds period will stop scan tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5seconds, scan tuning moves to the next station.

m to m Radio memory buttons:

The audio system can store up to 12 FM station fre-quencies (for FM1 and FM2) and 6 AM station fre-quencies.

SAA2130Z


To store the station frequency manually:

1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station fre-quency using the SEEK or SCAN function, orusing the TUNE knob.

2. Push and hold a radio memory button ( to) until a beep sounds. (The radio mutes

when the memory button is pushed.)

3. The sound will resume, and memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Perform steps 1 to 3 for all other memory but-tons.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audiofuse opens, the radio memory will be erased. In thiscase, reset the desired stations.

AUTO.P (automatic preset) button:

The audio system can store up to 6 FM and 6 AMstation frequencies in the automatic preset memory.

To store the station frequency automatically, pushand hold the AUTO.P button for more than 1.5 sec-onds after turning the radio on. The station will beautomatically stored in the automatic presetmemory.

Push the AUTO.P button for less than 1.5 secondsto switch back and forth between the manual presetmemory (radio memory buttons) and automatic pre-set memory. “AUTO P” is indicated on the displaywhile using the automatic preset memory.

Radio Data System (RDS):

When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manualtuning, the RDS data is received and the ProgrammeService (PS) name is displayed immediately.

Compact Disc (CD) changer operationThe audio system operates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

• Do not force the compact disc into the slot.This could damage the player.


LOAD button:

You can load and store up to 6 CDs in the CDchanger.

When the button is pushed, the CD loadingslot will open and the loading position will be dis-played.

Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facingup. The CD will be guided automatically into the slotand will start playing. If another audio source is al-ready playing, it will automatically turn off and theCD will start playing.

To load a CD in the CD changer:

1. Push the button for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD selectbuttons to . If no slot is selected, theCD changer will automatically select a slot whichis available.

3. Insert a CD into the slot.

To load 6 CDs in the CD changer in succession,push the button for more than 1.5 seconds.

DISC button:

When the DISC button is pushed while the audiosystem is off and CDs are loaded, the audio systemwill turn on and a CD will start playing.

If another audio source is playing when the DISCbutton is pushed with CDs loaded, the audio sourcewill automatically turn off and a CD will start playing.

Audio text:

To display the CD text on the screen (text pro-grammed CD only), select the “TEXT” key on thescreen while a CD is being played using the multi-function controller. The following CD text will be dis-played on the screen.

(CD)

• Disc title

SAA2130Z


• Track title


• Folder title

• File title

• Song title

• Album title

• Artist

Forward/AutomaticProgramme Search (APS)forward Rewind/AutomaticProgramme Search (APS)rewind:

When the (Rewind) or (Forward) but-ton is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a CDis being played, the CD will play while forwarding orrewinding. When the button is released, the CD willreturn to normal playing speed.

When the or button is pushed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a CD is being played, thenext track or the beginning of the current track onthe CD will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used toselect tracks when the CD play mode screen isshown on the display. (CD will be indicated on theheader of the screen.)

m to m CD select buttons:

To change to another CD already loaded in the CDchanger, push the corresponding CD selectto button or choose a CD displayed on thescreen using the multi-function controller.

SCAN/RPT button:

When the button is pushed while a CD isbeing played, the play pattern can be changed asfollows:

(CD)


CD EJECT button:

To eject a CD, push the CD eject ( ) button forless than 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the CDs, push the button for morethan 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while a CD is beingplayed, the CD will come out and the system willturn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will bepulled back into the slot to protect it from dam-age.


1. Source select switch

2. Tuning (where fitted)/ENTER switch

3. Volume control switch

4. BACK switch

AUDIO CONTROL STEERINGSWITCH

Tuning/ENTER switchPush the switch upward or downward to select achannel, track, CD or folder when they are listed onthe display. You can also use the ENTER switch toselect the items on the setting menu screen.

While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or Audiosetting screen, some audio functions can also becontrolled using the ENTER switch. The functionvaries depending on if you push the switch shorter(less than 1.5 seconds) or longer (more than 1.5seconds).

RADIO:

• Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next or previous preset channel

• Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Next or previous station/channel

CD:


Next track or the beginning of the current track


Disc change (When only one disc is loaded, the1st track of the disc will be selected.)

CD with MP3/WMA:


Next track or the beginning of the current track


Folder change (When the last folder on a disc isplaying, the first folder of the next disc will beselected.)

DVD (where fitted):


Next track/chapter or the beginning of the cur-rent track/chapter


Next group/title or the beginning of the currentgroup/title

SOURCE select switchPush the source select switch to change the modein the sequence of AM, FM, CD changer and DVD(where fitted).

Volume control switchPush the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to in-crease or decrease the volume.

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the previous screenor cancel the selection if it is not completed.

SAA2272

Type A

SAA2131Z



The auxiliary sockets are located on the rear side ofthe centre console. NTSC compatible devices suchas video games, camcorders and portable videoplayers can be connected to the auxiliary sockets.Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3 play-ers, can also be connected to the system throughthe auxiliary sockets.

The auxiliary sockets are colour coded for identifica-tion purposes.

• Yellow - video input

• White - left channel audio input

• Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a socket, turn off thepower of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the sockets,push the DISC·AUX or AUX (where fitted) buttonrepeatedly until the display switches to the AUXmode.

AUX SETTINGSWhen the display is in the AUX mode, select the“Settings/DVD” or “Settings” (where fitted) key us-ing the multi-function controller and push the ENTERbutton. The AUX setting display will appear.

DVD (where fitted):

Switches the output source to DVD.

Disp. Mode:

Choose one of the following display modes.

• Normal

• Wide

• Cinema

SAA1856Z SAA2239Z

Type A

SAA2078Z

Type B

AUXILIARY SOCKETS


If your vehicle is equipped with the mobile entertain-ment system, you can enjoy playing a Digital Versa-tile Disc (DVD), which provides the images andsounds both in the front and rear display screens.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the DVDentertainment system while driving so full atten-tion may be given to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

• Do not attempt to use the system in extremelyhigh or low temperature condition [below−20°C (−4°F) or above 70°C (158°F)].

• To avoid draining the vehicle battery, do notoperate the system for more than 15 minuteswithout starting the engine.

The front display is designed not to show theimages while driving, as the driver’s attentionmust be given to vehicle operation for safety.Sounds are available. To show the images in thefront display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,move the selector lever to the P (Park) positionand apply the parking brake.

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)SYSTEM COMPONENTS

DVD playerThe DVD player is located inside of the centre con-sole. Insert a DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing the front passenger’s seat side. The DVD willbe guided automatically into the slot.

When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT but-ton j1 .

CAUTION

• Do not force a DVD into the slot. This couldcause damage the player.


Displays

WARNING

Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply theparking brake to view the images on the frontcentre display screen using the DVD player.

CAUTION

• The glass screen on the liquid crystal displaymay break if hit with a hard or sharp object. Ifthe glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crys-talline material, which contains a smallamount of mercury. In case of contact withskin, wash immediately with soap and water.

• Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning the Mo-bile Entertainment System components. Donot use solvents or cleaning solutions.

• Be sure to stow the rear display when it is notused.

SAA1863Z

SAA2002Z

Flip-down screen

MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (where fitted)


Use the remote controller to operate the motorisedflip-down rear display screen.

1. Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE but-ton on the remote controller to open or close thedisplay.

2. Adjust the display angle by pushing the DISPLAYTILT or button.

The screen can also be opened using the multi-function controller. (See “How to use SETTINGbutton” earlier in this section.)

Do not block the range of the wireless remote con-troller receiver and wireless headphones transmitterj1 .

CAUTION

Do not touch the display when it is opening orclosing.

HeadphonesHeadphones are a wireless type and no cables arenecessary. You can use them in almost all the rangesin the rear seat for listening to the sound from DVD.(It is not possible to use the headphones in the frontseat.)

Power ON/OFF:

Push the POWER button to turn the headphones onor off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the volume.

The headphones will automatically be turned off inabout 5 minutes if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, keep the power turned off when not inuse.

If the sound from the headphones is not clear, it maybe due to interference from an infrared communica-

tion device or a mobile phone. Turn down the head-phone volume or stop using the headphones.

It is possible that the headphones may be out of therange of the transmitter installed in the rear flip downdisplay screen. This is not a malfunction.

It is also possible that the sound may be interruptedtemporarily when there is an obstacle between theheadphones and the transmitter. Remove the ob-stacle, such as opaque materials, hands, hair, etc.

SAA0720Z

SAA0721Z


DVD remote controllerThe DVD remote controller has the following con-trols:

1. REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE button

2. DVD button

3. Joystick

4. AUX button

5. ENTER button

6. DISP button

7. VOLUME CONTROL button ( or )

8. Headphones button

9. TRACK/CHANNEL button ( or )

10. DISPLAY TILT button ( or )

11. BACK button

12. ASPECT button

13. SOUND button

14. Keypad

See “Playing Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)” later inthis section for the function of each button.

DVD REMOTE CONTROLLER ANDHEADPHONE BATTERYCAUTION

• An improperly disposed battery can harm theenvironment. Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

• When changing batteries, do not let dust or oilget on the components.

SAA1828

SAA0978Z

SAA0723Z


To replace the battery:

1. Open the lid as illustrated.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

• Recommended battery:

Size AA × 2 (DVD remote controller)

Size AAA × 2 (headphones)

• Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

• Make sure that the j+ and j- ends on the bat-teries match the markings inside the compart-ment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If you are not using the remote control for long peri-ods of time, remove the batteries.

Replacement of the batteries is needed when theremote control only functions at extremely close dis-tances to the Mobile Entertainment System (MES)or not at all.

BEFORE OPERATING DVDENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

PrecautionsStart the engine when using the DVD entertainmentsystem.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the DVDsystem or wear the headphones while the ve-hicle is in motion so that full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

• Only operate the DVD while the vehicle en-gine is running. Operating the DVD for ex-tended periods of time with the engine OFFcan discharge the vehicle battery.

• Do not allow the system to get wet. Excessivemoisture such as spilled liquids may causethe system to malfunction.

• While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVDplayer does not guarantee complete function-ality of all VIDEO-CD formats.

Copyright and trademark

• The technology protected by the U.S. patent andother intellectual property rights owned by Mac-rovision Corporation and other right holders isadopted for this system.

• This copyright protected technology cannot beused without a permit from Macrovision Corpo-

ration. It is limited to be personal use, etc., aslong as the permit from Macrovision Corporationis not issued.

• Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

• Dolby digital is manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories, Inc.

• Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are trade-marks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

• DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are reg-istered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Parental level (parental control)DVDs with the parental control setting can be playedwith this system. Please use your own judgement toset the parental control with the system.

Disc selectionYou can play the following disc formats with theDVD player:

• DVD-VIDEO

• DVD-AUDIO

• VIDEO-CD

• CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD withMP3/WMA cannot be played.)

Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the codeapplicable to your country. (The region code is dis-played as a small symbol printed on the top of theDVD.) This vehicle-installed DVD player can onlyplay DVDs with an applicable region code.


Display settings

• Front display

To adjust the front display mode, push the SET-TING button while the DVD is being played.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,colour, contrast and black level select each keyusing the multi-function controller and push theENTER button.

Then you can adjust each item using the multi-function controller. After changes have beenmade push the BACK button to save the set-tings.

• Rear display

To adjust the rear display mode, push the “DISP”(Display) button on the remote controller.

To adjust the display brightness, tint, colour andcontrast, select each key using the joystick onthe remote controller and tilt the joystick to rightor left.

Push the BACK button to apply the settings andreturn to the previous display. PLAYING DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC

(DVD)

DISC·AUX/DISC (where fitted) buttonPark the vehicle in a safe location for the frontseat occupants to operate the DVD player whilewatching the images.

Push the DISC·AUX or DISC (where fitted) buttonon the instrument panel and turn the display to theDVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed automati-cally.

The operation screen will be turned on when theDISC·AUX or DISC (where fitted) button is pushedwhile a DVD is being played, and it will turn off auto-matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,push the DISC·AUX or DISC (where fitted) buttonagain.

DVD operation keysTo operate the DVD player, select the preferred keydisplayed on the operation screen using the multi-function controller.

PAUSE:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER buttonto pause the DVD. To resume playing the DVD, usethe “PLAY” key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible to push the“ ” button on the keypad of the remote control-ler.

PLAY:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER buttonto start playing the DVD, for example, after pausingthe DVD.

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to pushthe “ ” button on the keypad of the remote con-troller.

SAA2241Z

Operation screen (type A)

SAA2069Z

Operation screen (type B — where fitted)


STOP:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER buttonto stop playing the DVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to pushthe “ ” button on the keypad of the remote con-troller.

SKIP (FORWARD):

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER buttonto skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward. The chap-ters will advance the number of times the ENTERbutton is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible topush the “ ” button on the keypad of the remotecontroller.

SKIP (REWIND):

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER buttonto skip the chapter(s) of the disc backward. Thechapters will go back the number of times theENTER button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also possibleto push the “ ” button on the keypad of theremote controller.

Settings keysSelect the “Settings/AUX” or “Settings” (where fit-ted) key with the multi-function controller and pushthe ENTER button to adjust the following settings.

The items indicated with “*” can also be set from therear display. Push the “DVD” button on the remotecontroller while a DVD is being played. Select thepreferred item using the joystick “ ” on the re-mote controller and push the ENTER “ ” but-ton.

AUX* (where fitted):

Select the “AUX” key and push the ENTER button toswitch the output source to AUX.

Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):

Some menus specific to each disc will be shown.For details, see the instructions attached to the disc.

Top Menu* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):

Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For de-tails, see the instructions attached to the disc.

SAA2240Z

Settings — front (type A)

SAA2070Z

Settings — front (type B — where fitted)

SAA2014Z

Settings (rear)


Audio* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO-CD) /Subtitle* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):

Choose the preferred language using the multi-func-tion controller and push the ENTER button.

To turn off the subtitle, push and hold the ENTERbutton until a beep sounds.

Display Mode* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO,VIDEO-CD):

Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or “Cin-ema” mode using the multi-function controller andpush the ENTER button again.

Angle* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):

If the DVD contains different angles (such as mov-ing images), the current image angle can beswitched to another one.

Select the “Angle” key and push the ENTER button.When the “+” side or “−” side is selected, the anglewill change.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will beshown on the bottom of the screen if the scene canbe seen from a different angle.

10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO,VIDEO-CD, CD-DA):

Select the “10 Key Search” key and push the ENTERbutton to open the number entry screen.

Input the number you want to search for and selectthe “OK” key with the multi-function controller. Thenpush the ENTER button. The specified Title/Chap-ter or Group/Track will be played.

Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO):

The scene with the specified title will be displayedthe number of times the “+” side or “−” side is se-lected.

Group Search* (DVD-AUDIO):

The scene with the specified group will be displayedthe number of times the “+” side or “−” side is se-lected.

Select No.* (VIDEO-CD):

Select the “Select No.” key and push the ENTERbutton to open the number entry screen.

Input the number you want to search for and selectthe “OK” key with the multi-function controller. Thenpush the ENTER button. The specified scene will beplayed.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):

DVD menus are automatically configured and thecontents will be played directly when the “MenuSkip” key is turned on. Note that some discs maynot be played directly even if this item is turned on.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO,VIDEO-CD):

Select the “DVD Language” key and push theENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number corresponding to the preferredlanguage and select the “OK” key with the multi-function controller. Then push the ENTER button.The DVD top menu language will be changed to theone specified.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO):

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you totune the dynamic range of the sound recorded in theDolby Digital format.

Remote controller operationUse the remote controller to adjust the followingitems.

Rear display open/close:

To open or close the flip-down rear display, pushthe “ ” button on the remote controller.

Joystick:

Use the joystick “ ” to select the items displayedon the rear screen.

ENTER button:

Push the ENTER “ ” button to make the se-lected item complete on the rear screen.

BACK button:

Press to go back to the previous screen or cancelthe selection.

Display tilt:

Adjust the display angle by pushing the “DISPLAYTILT” button or .

DVD mode:

To display the DVD menu on the rear display screen,push the “DVD” button.


AUX mode:

To select the AUX (auxiliary sockets), mode, pushthe AUX button.

Volume:

To control the volume level, push the “VOL” buttonor .

Display:

Press to adjust the rear display screen brightness,tint, contrast, etc.

Aspect:

To change the display size, push the “ASPECT”button. Each time the button is pushed, the displaysize will change to “Cinema”, “Wide”, “Full” or “Nor-mal”.

Sound:

To change the language, push the SOUND button.Each time the button is pushed, the language willchange to each language stored in the DVD.

Headphones:

The DVD sound can be heard through the head-phones.

Push the headphones “ ” button. Each time thebutton is pushed, the headphones mode will switchto ON or OFF.

To control the volume of sound from the head-phones, use the volume control knob attached tothe headphones.

Track/Channel:

Press to skip to the previous or next radio station,CD track or DVD scene selection.

Keypad:

: PLAY/PAUSE button

: STOP button

: FORWARD button

: REWIND button

: FORWARD button for still images (for DVD-AUDIO)

: REWIND button for still images (for DVD-AUDIO)

CARE AND MAINTENANCEUse a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your Mobile Entertainment System (DVDplayer face, screen, remote controller, etc.).

CAUTION

• Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutionswhen cleaning the video system.

• Do not use excessive force on the monitorscreen.

• Avoid touching or scratching the monitorscreen as it may become dirty or damaged.

• Do not attempt to operate the system in ex-treme temperature conditions [below −20°C(−4°F) and above 70°C (158°F)].

• Do not attempt to operate the system in ex-treme humidity conditions (less than 10% ormore than 75%).


When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone inyour vehicle, be sure to observe the following cau-tions, otherwise the new equipment may adverselyaffect the Engine Control System and other elec-tronic parts.

CAUTION

• Keep the antenna as far away as possible fromthe Electronic Control Module.

• Keep the antenna wire at least 20 cm (8 in)away from the Engine Control harnesses. Donot route the antenna wire next to any har-nesses.

• Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

• Connect the ground wire from the radio chas-sis to the body.

• For details, consult a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop.

For further information, visit the NISSAN web site:www.nissan-europe.com. Select your country fromthe list and go to the “SERVICES” menu. If not avail-able on the web site, contact a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop.

CAR PHONE AND CB RADIO


5 Starting and drivingStarting and driving

Running-in schedule ................................................ 5-2Before starting engine.............................................. 5-2Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .......................... 5-2Three-way catalyst .............................................. 5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ......... 5-4Driving safety precautions................................... 5-4

Care when driving ................................................... 5-5Engine cold start period...................................... 5-5Loading luggage................................................. 5-5Driving on wet roads........................................... 5-5Driving under winter conditions ........................... 5-5

Push-button ignition switch ...................................... 5-6Precautions on push-button ignition switchoperation ............................................................ 5-6Intelligent Key system ......................................... 5-6Steering lock ...................................................... 5-7Ignition switch positions...................................... 5-7Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).......... 5-8Intelligent Key battery discharge.......................... 5-8

Starting engine ........................................................ 5-9Driving vehicle ......................................................... 5-9

Driving with Continuously Variable Transmis-sion (CVT).......................................................... 5-9

Four-wheel drive (4WD)........................................... 5-13Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) lock switchoperations .......................................................... 5-134WD warning light.............................................. 5-14

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) (wherefitted)/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system(where fitted) ........................................................... 5-15

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)/VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ................... 5-16

Cruise control.......................................................... 5-17Precautions on cruise control.............................. 5-17Cruise control operations.................................... 5-17

Parking.................................................................... 5-18Trailer towing........................................................... 5-20

Operating precautions ........................................ 5-20Tyre pressure ..................................................... 5-20Safety chains...................................................... 5-20Trailer brakes...................................................... 5-20Trailer detection (where fitted) ............................ 5-20Coupling device installation................................. 5-21

Power steering system............................................. 5-21Brake system........................................................... 5-22

Brake precautions .............................................. 5-22Brake assist........................................................ 5-22Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).......................... 5-22

Vehicle security........................................................ 5-23Cold weather driving................................................ 5-24

Battery ............................................................... 5-24Engine coolant.................................................... 5-24Tyre equipment................................................... 5-24Special winter equipment.................................... 5-24Parking brake ..................................................... 5-25Corrosion protection........................................... 5-25

During the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles), follow theserecommendations to obtain maximum engine per-formance and ensure the future reliability andeconomy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in shortened enginelife and reduced engine performance.

• Do not drive at a constant speed, either fast orslow, for long periods of time.

• Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

• Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

• Do not start quickly.

• Do not brake hard as much as possible.

• Do not tow a trailer for at least the first 800 km(500 miles).

WARNING

The driving characteristics of your vehicle willchange remarkably by any additional load and itsdistribution, as well as by adding optional equip-ment (trailer coupling, roof racks, etc.). Your driv-ing style and speed must be adjusted accord-ingly. Especially when carrying heavy loads, yourspeed must be reduced adequately.

• Make sure the area around the vehicle is free ofobstacles.

• Visually inspect tyres for their appearance andcondition. Also check the tyre pressure forproper inflation.

• Check that all windows and lights are clean.

• Adjust the seat and head restraint positions.

• Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrorpositions.

• Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers todo likewise.

• Check the operation of the warning lights whenthe ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

• Maintenance items in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section should be checked peri-odically.

WARNING

• Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone inyour vehicle. Pets should not be left aloneeither. They could unknowingly activateswitches or controls and inadvertentlybecome involved in a serious accident andinjure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tem-peratures in a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to cause severe or pos-sibly fatal illness to people or animals.

• Properly secure all cargo to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Do not breathe exhaust gas; it contains co-lourless and odourless carbon monoxide. Car-bon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause un-consciousness or death.

• If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fullyopen, and have the vehicle inspected imme-diately.

• Do not run the engine in closed spaces suchas a garage.

RUNNING-IN SCHEDULE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

• Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-ning for an extended period of time.

• Keep the back door closed while driving, oth-erwise exhaust gas could be drawn into thepassenger compartment. If you must drivewith the back door open, follow these precau-tions:

– Open all the windows.

– Turn the air recirculation switch off and setthe fan control to the highest level to circu-late the air.

• If a special body or other equipment is addedfor recreational or other usage, follow themanufacturer’s recommendation to preventcarbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.(Some recreational vehicle appliances suchas stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may alsogenerate carbon monoxide.)

• The exhaust system and body should be in-spected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-shop whenever:

– Your vehicle is raised for service.

– You suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-ing into the passenger compartment.

– You notice a change in the sound of theexhaust system.

– You have had an accident involving dam-age to the exhaust system, underbody, orrear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

WARNING

• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system arevery hot. Keep people, animals and flammablematerials away from the exhaust system com-ponents.

• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-mable materials such as dry grass, wastepa-per or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.


The three-way catalyst is an emission control deviceinstalled in the exhaust system. Exhaust gas in thethree-way catalyst is burned at high temperatures tohelp reduce pollutants.

CAUTION

• Do not use leaded petrol. For details, see “Fuelrecommendation” in the “9. Technicalinformation” section.

Deposits from leaded petrol seriously reducethe ability of the three-way catalyst to helpreduce exhaust pollutants and/or damage thethree-way catalyst.

• Keep the engine of your vehicle tuned up. Mal-functions in the ignition, fuel injection, or elec-trical systems may cause overrich fuel to flowinto the three-way catalyst, causing it to over-heat. Do not keep driving if the engine mis-fires, or if noticeable loss of performance orother unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected promptlyby a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

• Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level.Running out of fuel could cause the engine tomisfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

• Do not race the engine while warming it up.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start theengine.

Starting and driving 5-3

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rolloverrate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passengercars to make them capable of performing in a widevariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher centre of gravity than ordi-nary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearanceis a better view of the road, allowing you to antici-pate problems. However, they are not designed forcornering at the same speeds as conventional pas-senger cars any more than low-slung sports carsare designed to perform satisfactorily under off-roadconditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns orabrupt manoeuvres, particularly at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of control orvehicle rollover.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONSYour NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water ormud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisureuse, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) modelsare less capable than 4WD models for rough roaddriving and extrication when stuck in deep snow,mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

• Drive carefully when off the road and avoiddangerous areas. Every person who drives or

rides in this vehicle should be seated withtheir seat belt fastened. This will keep youand your passengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

• Do not drive across steep slopes. Insteaddrive either straight up or straight down theslopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over side-ways much more easily than they can forwardor backward.

• Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If youdrive up them, you may stall. If you drive downthem, you may not be able to control yourspeed. If you drive across them, you may rollover.

• Do not shift ranges while driving on downhillgrades as this could cause loss of control ofthe vehicle.

• Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. Atthe top there could be a drop-off or other haz-ard that could cause an accident.

• If the engine stalls or you cannot make it tothe top of a steep hill, never attempt to turnaround. Your vehicle could tip or roll over.Always back straight down in R (Reverse)range. Never back down in N (Neutral), usingonly the brake, as this could cause loss ofcontrol.

• Heavy braking going down a hill could causeyour brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in

loss of control and an accident. Apply brakeslightly and use a low range to control yourspeed.

• Unsecured cargo can be thrown around whendriving over rough terrain. Properly secure allcargo so it will not be thrown forward andcause injury to you or your passengers.

• To avoid raising the centre of gravity exces-sively, do not exceed the rated capacity of theroof rack (where fitted) and evenly distributethe load. Secure heavy loads in the luggagecompartment as far forward and as low aspossible. Do not equip the vehicle with tyreslarger than specified in this manual. This couldcause your vehicle to roll over.

• Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steer-ing wheel when driving off-road. The steeringwheel could move suddenly and injure yourhands. Instead drive with your fingers andthumbs on the outside of the rim.

• Before operating the vehicle, ensure that thedriver and all passengers have their seat beltsfastened.

• Always drive with the floor mats in place asthe floor may became hot.

• Lower your speed when encountering strongcrosswinds. With a higher centre of gravity,your NISSAN is more affected by strong sidewinds. Slower speeds ensure better vehiclecontrol.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONS


• Do not drive beyond the performance capabil-ity of the tyres, even with 4WD engaged.

• For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt toraise two wheels off the ground and shift thetransmission to any drive or reverse positionwith the engine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury. (4WD mod-els)

• Do not attempt to test an 4WD equipped ve-hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer or similarequipment even if the other two wheels areraised off the ground. Make sure you informtest facility personnel that your vehicle isequipped with 4WD before it is placed on adynamometer. Using the wrong test equip-ment may result in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or personal injury.(4WD models)

• When a wheel is off the ground due to anunlevel surface, do not spin the wheel exces-sively. (4WD models)

• Accelerating quickly, sharp steering manoeu-vres or sudden braking may cause loss of con-trol.

• If at all possible, avoid sharp turning manoeu-vres, particularly at high speeds. Your vehiclehas a higher centre of gravity than a conven-tional passenger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional passenger cars. Failure to oper-ate this vehicle correctly could result in lossof control and/or a rollover accident.

• Always use tyres of the same type, size, brand,construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), andtread pattern on all four wheels. Install trac-tion devices on the front wheels when drivingon slippery roads and drive carefully.

• Be sure to check the brakes immediately af-ter driving in mud or water. See “Brakesystem” later in this section for wet brakes.

• Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. Ifyou get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward,backward or sideways, you could be injured.

• Whenever you drive off-road through sand,mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, morefrequent maintenance may be required. Seethe maintenance information in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”.

• Spinning the front wheels on slippery surfacesmay cause the 4WD warning light to flash andthe 4WD system to automatically switch fromthe 4WD mode to the 2WD mode. This couldreduce traction. Be especially careful whentowing a trailer. (4WD models)

Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is es-sential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, youshould be the one who knows best how to drive inthe given circumstances.

ENGINE COLD START PERIODDue to the higher engine speeds, when the engineis cold, extra caution must be exercised when se-lecting a gear during the engine warm-up periodafter starting the engine.

LOADING LUGGAGELoads, their distribution and the attachment of equip-ment (coupling devices, roof baggage carriers, etc.)will considerably change the driving characteristicsof the vehicle considerably. Driving style and speedmust be adjusted accordingly.

DRIVING ON WET ROADS

• Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly.

• Avoid sharp turns or sudden lane changes.

• Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle infront.

When water covers the road surface with waterpuddles, small water streams, etc., reduce speed toprevent aquaplaning which can cause skidding andloss of control. Worn tyres increase this risk.

DRIVING UNDER WINTERCONDITIONS

• Drive safely.

CARE WHEN DRIVING


• Avoid starting off, accelerating or stopping sud-denly.

• Avoid sharp turns or sudden lane changes.

• Avoid sudden steering actions.

• Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle infront.

PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTONIGNITION SWITCH OPERATIONDo not operate the push-button ignition switchwhile driving the vehicle except in an emergency.(The engine will stop when the ignition switch ispushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switchis pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.)The steering wheel may lock and could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle. This couldresult in serious vehicle damage or personal in-jury.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEMThe Intelligent Key system can operate the ignitionswitch without taking the key out from your pocketor bag. The operating environment and/or condi-tions may affect the Intelligent Key system opera-tion.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are dis-played on the dot matrix liquid crystal display be-tween the speedometer and tachometer. (See “DOTmatrix liquid crystal display” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.)

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with youwhen operating the vehicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the ve-hicle when you leave the vehicle.

• If the vehicle battery is discharged, the igni-tion switch cannot be switched from the LOCKposition, and if the steering lock is engaged,

the steering wheel cannot be moved. Chargethe battery as soon as possible. (See “Jumpstarting” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-tion.)

Operating rangeThe Intelligent Key can only be used for starting theengine when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-fied operating range j1 as illustrated.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almostdischarged or strong radio waves are present nearthe operating location, the Intelligent Key system’soperating range becomes narrower and may notfunction properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, itis possible for anyone, even someone who does notcarry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switchto start the engine.

• The luggage room area is not included in theoperating range of the engine start function.

SSD0436Z

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITIONSWITCH


• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrumentpanel, inside the glove box, door pocket or thecorner of the interior compartment, the Intelli-gent Key may not function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door orwindow outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Keymay function.

STEERING LOCKThe ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theftsteering lock device.

To lock steering wheel1. Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

where the ignition switch position indicator willnot illuminate.

2. Open or close the door. The ignition switch turnsto the LOCK position.

3. Turn the steering wheel 1/8 of a turn to the rightor left from the straight up position.

To unlock steering wheelPush the ignition switch, and the steering wheel willbe automatically unlocked.

CAUTION

• If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, thepush-button ignition switch cannot beswitched from the LOCK position.

• If the steering lock release malfunction indi-cator appears on the dot matrix liquid crystaldisplay, push the ignition switch again while

rotating the steering wheel slightly to the rightand left. (See “DOT matrix liquid crystaldisplay” in the “2. Instruments and controls”section.)

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONSWhen the ignition switch is pushed without depress-ing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position willchange as follows:

• Push centre once to change to ACC.

• Push centre two times to change to ON.

• Push centre three times to change to “OFF”.(No position illuminates.)

• Push centre four times to return to ACC.

• Open or close any door to return to LOCK fromthe “OFF” position.

LOCK positionThe ignition switch and steering lock can only belocked at this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intel-ligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in theport.

ACC positionThe electrical accessory power activates at this po-sition without the engine turned on.

ON positionThe ignition system and the electrical accessorypower activate at this position without the engineturned on.

OFF positionThe engine is turned off with the steering wheelunlocked.

WARNING

Never push the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-tion while driving. The steering wheel may lockand cause the driver to lose control of the ve-hicle, resulting in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

SSD0688Z


CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods oftime when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition and the engine is not running. This candischarge the battery.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT)The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch cannot be switched to the LOCK positionuntil the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) posi-tion. When pushing the ignition switch to the “OFF”position, make sure the selector lever is in the P(Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be switched to theLOCK position:

1. SHIFT “P” warning appears on the dot matrix liq-uid crystal display and a chime sounds.


3. If the ignition switch is in the ACC position, PUSHwarning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystaldisplay.

4. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch isswitched to the ON position.

5. PUSH warning appears again on the dot matrixliquid crystal display.

6. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch isswitched to the “OFF” position.

For warnings and indicators on the dot matrix liquid

crystal display, see “DOT matrix liquid crystaldisplay” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

If the ignition switch is switched to the LOCK posi-tion, the selector lever cannot be moved from the P(Park) position. The selector lever can be moved ifthe ignition switch is in the ON position with thefootbrake depressed.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERYDISCHARGEIf the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-charged, the guide light jB of the Intelligent Keyport jA blinks and the indicator appears on the dotmatrix liquid crystal display. (See “DOT matrix liquidcrystal display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”section.)

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the portj1 allows you to start the engine. Make sure that

the key ring side faces backward as illustrated. In-sert the Intelligent Key in the port until it is latchedand secured.

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, pushthe ignition switch to the “OFF” position and pull theIntelligent Key out of the port.

CAUTION

• The Intelligent Key port does not charge theIntelligent Key battery. If you see the Intelli-gent Key battery discharge indicator on thedot matrix liquid crystal display, replace thebattery as soon as possible. (See “IntelligentKey battery” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.)

• Never place anything except the IntelligentKey in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so maycause damage to the equipment.

• Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the correctdirection when inserting it to the IntelligentKey port. The engine may not start if it is in theincorrect direction.

• Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-gent Key port after the ignition switch ispushed to the “OFF” position.

SSD0690Z

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model


1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or the N(Neutral) position.

The starter is designed to operate only whenthe selector lever is in the proper position.

The Intelligent Key must be carried when op-erating the ignition switch.

3. Confirm the key location and carry the key withyou when starting and driving the vehicle.

4. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. De-press the brake pedal and push the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and re-lease the ignition switch while depressing thebrake pedal with the ignition switch in any posi-tion.

5. Immediately release the ignition switch when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run,repeat the above procedures.

If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold orhot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and holdit. Push the ignition switch for up to 15 secondswhile holding. Release the accelerator pedal whenthe engine starts.

CAUTION

• As soon as the engine has started, releasethe ignition switch immediately.

• Do not operate the starter for more than 15seconds at a time. If the engine does not start,

push the ignition switch to the “OFF” positionand wait 10 seconds before cranking the en-gine again. Otherwise, the starter could bedamaged.

• If it becomes necessary to start the enginewith a booster battery and jumper cables, theinstructions and cautions contained in the “6.In case of emergency” section should be care-fully followed.

6. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 secondsafter starting the engine to warm-up. Drive atmoderate speeds for a short distance first, espe-cially in cold weather.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while theengine is warming up.

To stop the engine, move the selector lever to the P(Park) position, apply the parking brake and pushthe ignition switch to the “OFF” position.

DRIVING WITH CONTINUOUSLYVARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) inyour vehicle is electronically controlled to producemaximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages. Fol-low these procedures for maximum vehicle perfor-mance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically reduced toprotect the CVT if the engine speed increasesquickly when driving on slippery roads or whilebeing tested on some dynamometers.

CAUTION

• The cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward or re-verse gear before the engine has warmed up.

• Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicleis stopped. This could cause unexpected ve-hicle movement.

• Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads.This may cause a loss of control.

• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Re-verse) position while the vehicle is movingforward and P (Park), D (Drive) position whilethe vehicle is moving rearward. This couldcause serious damage to the transmission.

• Start the engine in either the P (Park) or N(Neutral) position. The engine will not start in

STARTING ENGINE DRIVING VEHICLE


any other gear position. If it does, have yourvehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop.

• Shift into the P (Park) position and apply theparking brake when at a standstill for longerthan a short waiting period.

• Keep the engine at idling speed while shiftingfrom the N (Neutral) position to any drivingposition.

• When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by depressing the ac-celerator pedal. The footbrake pedal shouldbe depressed in this situation.

Starting vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot-

brake pedal before attempting to move the selec-tor lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and movethe selector lever into a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake, the footbrake pedal,and then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

The CVT is designed so the footbrake pedalMUST be depressed before shifting from the P(Park) position to any driving position while theignition switch is in the ON position.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P(Park) position and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK, “OFF” or ACC position.

CAUTION

• DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL - Shiftingthe selector lever to D, R or manual shift modewithout depressing the footbrake pedalcauses the vehicle to move slowly when theengine is running. Make sure the footbrakepedal is depressed fully and the vehicle isstopped before shifting the selector lever.

• MAKE SURE OF THE SELECTOR LEVER POSI-TION - Make sure the selector lever is in thedesired position. D and manual shift modeare used to move forward and R to reverse.

• WARM UP THE ENGINE - Due to the higheridle speeds when the engine is cold, extracaution must be exercised when shifting theselector lever into the driving position imme-diately after starting the engine.

: Push the button while depressing the brakepedal,

: Push the button,: Just move the selector lever.

SSD0728Z

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models

SSD0819Z

Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models


Shifting

WARNING

• Apply the parking brake if the selector lever isin any position while the engine is not run-ning. Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away and resultin serious personal injury or property dam-age.

• If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine is run-ning and the footbrake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioningstop lights could cause an accident injuringyourself and others.

After starting the engine, fully depress the footbrakepedal and move the selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

If the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC positionfor any reason while the selector lever is in any posi-tion other than the P (Park) position, the ignitionswitch cannot be pushed to the LOCK position.

If the ignition switch cannot be pushed to the LOCKposition and the SHIFT P warning appears on thedot matrix liquid crystal display, perform the follow-ing steps:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch po-sition will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the “OFF” posi-tion.

P (Park):

Use this position when the vehicle is parked or whenstarting the engine. Make sure that the vehicle iscompletely stopped and move the selector leverinto the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first,and then move the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to reverse. Make sure that thevehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R(Reverse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged.The engine can be started in this position. You mayshift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalledengine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift modeWhen the selector lever is shifted from the D posi-tion to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stoppedor while driving, the transmission enters the manualshift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayedon the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1→← M2

→← M3

→← M4

→← M5

→← M6

• When shifting up, move the selector lever to the+ (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

• When shifting down, move the selector lever tothe − (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

• Moving the selector lever to the same side twicewill shift the ranges in succession. However, ifthis motion is rapidly done, the second shiftingmay not be completed properly.

M6 (Sixth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving athighway speeds.

However, you need to shift down the gears manu-ally when accelerating or passing another vehicle.

M5 (Fifth):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or forengine braking when driving down long slopes.

M4 (Fourth), M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly ordriving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud orfor maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.


• Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time in lower than M6 range.This reduces fuel economy.

• In the manual shift mode, the transmissionautomatically shifts down to M1 (First) beforethe vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerat-ing again, it is necessary to shift up to thedesired range.

• In the manual shift mode, the transmissionmay not shift to the selected gear. This helpsmaintain driving performance and reduces thechance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

• When cancelling the manual shift mode, returnthe shift lever to the D position. The transmissionreturns to the normal driving mode.

• When the CVT fluid temperature is extremelylow, the manual shift mode may not work andautomatically shift as a drive mode. This is not amalfunction. In this case, return the shift lever tothe D position and drive for a while and then shiftto the manual shift mode.

• When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the shiftrange may upshift in lower rpm than usual. Thisis not a malfunction.

Accelerator downshift - in D (Drive)position -For passing or climbing hills, depress the accelera-tor pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmissiondown into a lower gear, depending on the vehiclespeed.

Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the selector lever maynot be moved from the P (Park) position even withthe brake pedal depressed.

To release the shift lock, perform the following pro-cedure:


2. Remove the shift lock release slot cap jA usinga suitable tool.

3. Push down the shift lock release jB as illus-trated.

4. Push and hold the selector lever button jC andmove the selector lever to the N (Neutral) posi-tion jD while holding down the shift lock release.

5. Replace the removed slot cap to its original posi-tion.

If the steering wheel is locked, restore the batterypower supply and push the ignition switch to the

ON position. (See “Jump starting” in the “6. In caseof emergency” section.) And then, release the steer-ing wheel lock.

The vehicle may be moved by pushing it to the de-sired location.

If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the P(Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop check the CVT system as soon as pos-sible.

CAUTION

If the battery is discharged completely, the steer-ing wheel cannot be unlocked while the ignitionswitch is in the “OFF” position. Do not move thevehicle with the steering wheel locked.

High fluid temperature protection modeThis transmission has a high fluid temperature pro-tection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes toohigh (for example, when climbing steep grades inhigh temperature with heavy loads, such as whentowing a trailer), engine power and, under someconditions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-matically to reduce the chance of transmission dam-age. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the ac-celerator pedal, but engine and vehicle speed maybe limited.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will belocked in any of the forward gears depending onconditions.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions,

SSD0820Z


such as excessive wheel spinning and subse-quent hard braking, the fail-safe system may beactivated. This will occur even if all electrical cir-cuits are functioning properly. In this case, pushthe ignition switch to the “OFF” position and waitfor 10 seconds. Then push the ignition switchback to the ON position. The vehicle should re-turn to its normal operating condition. If it doesnot return to its normal operating condition, havea NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop checkthe transmission and repair it if necessary.

WARNING

• Do not drive beyond the performance capabil-ity of the tyres, even with 4WD engaged. Ac-celerating quickly, sharp steering manoeu-vres or sudden braking may cause loss ofcontrol.

• Always use tyres of the same type, size, brand,construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), andtread pattern on all four wheels. Install tyrechains on the front wheels when driving onslippery roads and drive carefully.

• For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt toraise two wheels off the ground and shift thetransmission to any drive or reverse positionwith the engine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

• Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped ve-hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as thedynamometers used by some states for emis-sions testing) or similar equipment even if theother two wheels are raised off the ground.Make sure that you inform the test facility per-sonnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer. Usingthe wrong test equipment may result in driv-etrain damage or unexpected vehicle move-ment which could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

• When a wheel is off the ground due to anunlevel surface, do not spin the wheel exces-sively.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) LOCKSWITCH OPERATIONSThe 4WD LOCK switch located on the lower side ofthe instrument panel. This switch is used to selectthe AUTO or LOCK mode depending on the drivingconditions.

Each time you push the lower part of the switch jA ,the 4WD mode will switch:AUTO → LOCK → AUTO.

LOCK modeThe LOCK indicator light will illuminate.

SSD0806Z

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)


AUTO modeThe LOCK indicator light will turn off.

4WDmode

Wheel driven 4WDLOCKindicatorlight

Use condi-tions

AUTO Distribution oftorque to the frontand rear wheelschanges automati-cally, depending onroad conditionsencountered[100:0] ⇔ [50:50].This results inimproved drivingstability.*1

Turnsoff.

For drivingon paved orslipperyroads

LOCK Four-wheel drive*2,*3

4WDLOCK

m

For drivingon roughroads

*1: When the rotation difference between the frontand rear wheels is large, the 4WD mode maychange from AUTO to LOCK for a while, how-ever, this is not a malfunction.

*2: LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode auto-matically when the vehicle has been driven at ahigh speed. The 4WD LOCK indicator light turnsoff.

*3: LOCK mode will automatically be cancelledwhen the ignition switch is turned to the OFFposition.

• If the 4WD LOCK switch is operated whileaccelerating or decelerating, or if the ignitionswitch is turned off, you may feel a jolt. Thisis normal.

• The oil temperature of power train parts willincrease if the vehicle is continuously oper-ated under conditions where the differencein rotation between the front and rear wheelsis large (wheel slip), such as when drivingthe vehicle on rough roads through sand,mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In thesecases, the 4WD warning light blinks rapidlyand the 4WD mode changes to 2WD to pro-tect the powertrain parts. If you stop drivingwith the engine idling and wait until the warn-ing light stops blinking, the 4WD returns tothe AUTO mode.

WARNING

• When driving straight, shift the 4WD LOCKswitch to AUTO. Do not operate the 4WDLOCK switch when making a turn or revers-ing.

• Do not operate the 4WD LOCK switch with thefront wheel spinning.

• Engine idling speed is high while warming upthe engine. Be especially careful when start-ing or driving on slippery surfaces.

• When turning the vehicle in LOCK mode onpaved roads, you may feel a braking effect.This is a normal condition of the 4WD model.

Warning light Comes on or blinks when:

mComes on

There is a malfunction in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system.

mBlinks rapidly

The power train oil temperaturerises abnormally.

mBlinks slowly

The difference in wheel rotation islarge.

4WD WARNING LIGHTThe 4WD warning light located in the meter comeson when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Itturns off soon after the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system whilethe engine is running, the warning light will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice persecond) while trying to free a stuck vehicle due tohigh power train oil temperature. The driving modemay change to two-wheel drive (2WD) mode. AUTO


mode may change to LOCK mode before the warn-ing light blinks. If the warning light blinks rapidly dur-ing operation, stop the vehicle with the engine idlingin a safe place immediately. Then if the light goes offafter a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Pull off theroad in a safe area, and idle the engine. Check thatall tyre sizes are the same, tyre pressure is correctand tyres are not worn.

CAUTION

• If the warning light remains on after the aboveoperation, have your vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soonas possible.

• Do not operate the engine with two wheels onthe free roller and the other two wheels raised.

• If the 4WD warning light comes on while driv-ing there may be a malfunction in the 4WDsystem. Reduce the vehicle speed and haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop as soon as possible.

• The power train may be damaged if you con-tinue driving with the warning light blinkingrapidly.

• Never drive on dry hard surface roads in theLOCK mode, as this will overload the power-train and may cause a serious malfunction.

WARNING

• The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is de-signed to help improve driving stability butdoes not prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds or due tocareless or dangerous driving techniques. Re-duce vehicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. Ifsuspension parts such as shock absorbers,struts, springs, stabiliser bars, bushings andwheels are not NISSAN-approved or are ex-tremely deteriorated the ESP/VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling perfor-mance, and the ESP OFF ( )/VDC OFF( ) indicator or “SLIP” ( ) indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate.

• If brake related parts such as brake pads, ro-tors and callipers are not standard equipmentor are extremely deteriorated, the ESP OFF/VDC OFF indicator or “SLIP” indicator or bothindicator lights may illuminate.

• If engine related parts such as a muffler arenot standard equipment or are extremely de-teriorated, the ESP OFF/VDC OFF indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights mayilluminate.

• When driving on extremely inclined surfacessuch as higher banked corners, the ESP/VDCsystem may not operate properly and the ESPOFF/VDC OFF indicator or “SLIP” indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate. Do notdrive on these types of roads.

• When driving on unstable surfaces such as aturntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the ESPOFF/VDC OFF indicator or “SLIP” indicator orboth indicator lights may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engine afterdriving onto a stable surface.

• If wheels or tyres other than those recom-mended are used, the ESP/VDC system maynot operate properly and ESP OFF/VDC OFFindicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicatorlights may illuminate.

• The ESP/VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tyres or tyre chains on a snow-coveredroad.

When accelerating or driving on slippery surfaces,the tyres may spin or slide. With the Electronic Sta-bility Programme (ESP)/Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system, sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle stability.

• When the ESP/VDC system is operating, the“SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

• If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road conditionsare slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed anddriving to these conditions. Be sure to drive care-

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAMME (ESP) (where fitted)/VEHICLEDYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (where fitted)


fully. (See “Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)off indicator light (where fitted)” in the “2. Instru-ments and controls” section or “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) off indicator light (where fitted)”in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

• Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the “SLIP”and ESP OFF/VDC OFF indicator lights illumi-nate in the instrument panel. As long as theseindicators are illuminated, the ESP/VDC systemfunction is cancelled.

The ESP/VDC system uses a Brake Limited SlipDifferential (BLSD) function to improve vehicle trac-tion. The BLSD system works when one of the driv-ing wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. TheBLSD system brakes the spinning wheel, which dis-tributes the driving power to the other drive wheel.If the vehicle is operated with the ESP/VDC systemturned off, all ESP/VDC system functions will beturned off.

The BLSD system and ABS will still operate with theESP/VDC system off. If the BLSD system is acti-vated, the “SLIP” indicator light will blink and youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in thebrake pedal. This is normal and is not an indicationof a malfunction.

While the ESP/VDC system is operating, you mayfeel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noiseor feel a vibration from under the bonnet. This is nor-mal and indicates that the ESP/VDC system is work-ing properly.

The ESP/VDC system computer has a built-in diag-nostic feature that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle at a low speedforward or backward. When the self-test occurs,you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsationin the footbrake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

ELECTRONIC STABILITYPROGRAMME (ESP)/VEHICLEDYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFFSWITCHThe vehicle should be driven with the ElectronicStability Programme (ESP)/Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the ESP/VDC system reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced evenif the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maxi-mum engine power is needed to free a stuck ve-hicle, turn the ESP/VDC system off.

To turn off the ESP/VDC system, push the ESPOFF/VDC OFF switch located on the lower side ofthe instrument panel. The / indicator lightwill illuminate.

Push the ESP OFF/VDC OFF switch again or re-start the engine to turn on the system.

SIC2257Z

SIC1881Z


1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. Cruise control MAIN switch

WARNING

• Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions. Doing socould cause a loss of vehicle control and re-sult in an accident.

– When it is not possible to keep the vehicleat a constant speed

– When driving in heavy traffic

– When driving in traffic that varies speed

– When driving in windy areas

– When driving on winding or hilly roads

– When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice,etc.) roads

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

• If the cruise control system malfunctions, it willcancel automatically. The CRUISE indicator lighton the meter panel will then blink to warn thedriver.

• If the engine coolant temperature becomes ex-cessively high, the cruise control system will can-cel automatically.

• If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control MAIN switch j4 off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

• The CRUISE indicator light may blink when thecruise control MAIN switch j4 is turned ONwhile pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE j1 ,SET/COAST j2 or CANCEL j3 switch. Toproperly set the cruise control system, performthe following procedures.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at speeds above40 km/h (25 MPH) without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal.

The cruise control will automatically be cancelled ifthe vehicle slows down more than approximately 13km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed.

Moving the selector lever to the N (Neutral) positionwill cancel the cruise control and the SET indicatorwill turn off.

Turning on cruise controlPush the cruise control MAIN switch j4 . TheCRUISE indicator illuminates.

Setting cruising speed1. Accelerate to the desired speed.

2. Push the SET/COAST switch j2 and release it.

3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The vehicle will maintain the set speed.

Passing another vehicle:

Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. Afterreleasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will re-turn to the previously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed whengoing up or down steep hills. In such cases, drivewithout the cruise control.

Resetting to slower speed:

Use any one of the following methods to reset to aslower speed.

• Lightly tap the footbrake pedal. When the ve-hicle reaches the desired speed, push and re-lease the SET/COAST switch j2 .

• Push and hold the SET/COAST switch j2 .When the vehicle reaches the desired speed,release the SET/COAST switch j2 .

• Quickly push and release the SET/COASTswitch j2 . This will reduce the vehicle speed byabout 1.6 km/h (1 MPH).

SSD0694Z

CRUISE CONTROL


Resetting to faster speed:

Use any one of the following methods to reset to afaster speed.

• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ve-hicle reaches the desired speed, push and re-lease the SET/COAST switch j2 .

• Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATEswitch j1 . When the vehicle reaches the de-sired speed, release the RESUME/ACCELER-ATE switch j1 .

• Quickly push and release the RESUME/ACCEL-ERATE switch j1 . This will increase the vehiclespeed by about 1.6 km/h (1 MPH).

Resuming at preset speed:

Push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATEswitch j1 .

The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speedwhen the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 MPH).

Cancelling cruising speedUse any one of the following methods to cancel theset speed.

• Push the CANCEL switch j3 .

• Tap the footbrake pedal.

• Push the cruise control MAIN switch j4 . TheCRUISE indicator turns off.

WARNING

• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-mable materials such as dry grass, waste pa-per or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

• Safe parking procedures require that both theparking brake be applied and the selector le-ver placed into the P (Park) position. Failureto do so could cause the vehicle to move un-expectedly or roll away and result in an acci-dent.

• When parking the vehicle, make sure the se-lector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.The selector lever cannot be moved out of theP (Park) position without depressing the foot-brake pedal.

• Never leave the engine running while the ve-hicle is unattended.

• Never leave children or adults who would nor-mally require the support of others alone inthe vehicle. Pets should not be left alone ei-ther. They could unknowingly activateswitches or controls and inadvertentlybecome involved in a serious accident andinjure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tem-peratures in a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to cause severe or pos-sibly fatal illness to people and animals.

PARKING


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.


3. To help prevent the vehicle from moving into traf-fic when parked on an incline, it is a good prac-tice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH KERB j1

Turn the wheels into the kerb and move the vehicleforward until the kerb side wheel gently touches thekerb. Then apply the parking brake.

HEADED UPHILL WITH KERB j2

Turn the wheels away from the kerb and allow thevehicle to move back until the kerb side wheel gen-tly touches the kerb. Then apply the parking brake.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, WITHOUTKERB j3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so thevehicle will move away from the centre of the road ifthe vehicle moves. Then apply the parking brake.


SSD0488Z

Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models

SSD0489Z

Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models


Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarilyto carry passengers and luggage.

Towing a trailer will place additional loads on yourvehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking andother systems. The towing of a trailer will exagger-ate other conditions such as sway caused by cross-winds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Your driving style and speed must be adjusted ac-cording to the circumstances. Before towing atrailer, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshopfor an explanation about the proper use of towingequipment.

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

• Avoid towing a trailer during the running-inschedule.

• Before driving, make sure that the lighting sys-tem of the trailer works properly.

• Observe the legal maximum speeds for traileroperation.

Do not exceed 100 km/h (62 MPH).

• Avoid abrupt starts, accelerations and stops.

• Avoid sharp turns and lane changes.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.

• Follow the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.

• Choose proper coupling devices (trailer hitch,safety chain, roof carrier, etc.) for your vehicleand trailer. These devices are available from a

NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop where youcan also obtain more detailed information abouttrailer towing.

• Never allow the total trailer load (trailer weightplus its cargo weight) to exceed the maximumset for the vehicle and the coupling device. Seea NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for moredetails.

• The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goodsare placed over the axle. The maximum allowablevertical load on the trailer hitch must not be ex-ceeded.

• Have your vehicle serviced more often than atthe intervals specified in the separately providedWarranty Information & Maintenance booklet.

• Trailer towing requires more fuel than under nor-mal circumstances because of a considerableincrease in traction power and resistance.

While towing a trailer, check the engine coolanttemperature indicator to prevent the vehicle fromoverheating.

TYRE PRESSUREWhen towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tyres to themaximum recommended COLD tyre pressure (forfull loading) indicated on the tyre placard.

Do not tow a trailer when the vehicle is installed witha temporary spare tyre or a compact spare tyre.

SAFETY CHAINSAlways use a suitable chain between the vehicleand trailer. The chain should be crossed and shouldbe attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumperor axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chainto permit turning corners.

TRAILER BRAKESEnsure that trailer brakes are installed as requiredby local regulations. Also check that all other trailerequipment conforms to local regulations.

Always block the wheels on both the vehicle andtrailer when parking. Apply the hand brake on thetrailer (where fitted). Parking on a steep slope is notrecommended.

If parking on a steep slope is unavoidable, place theselector lever in the P (Park) position, and turn thefront wheels towards the kerb.

TRAILER DETECTION (where fitted)When towing a trailer with a Genuine NISSAN towbar electrical kit and the turn signal switch is used,the electrical system of the vehicle will detect theadditional electrical load of the trailer lighting. As aresult, the direction indicator tone will be different.

TRAILER TOWING


COUPLING DEVICE INSTALLATIONNISSAN recommends that the coupling device fortrailer towing be installed under the following condi-tions:

• Maximum permissible vertical load on the cou-pling device: 981 N (100 kg, 221 lb)

• The coupling device, mounting points and instal-lation parts on your vehicle: as shown as an ex-ample in the illustration.

• Rear overhang of coupling device: jA 1,066 mm(42.0 in)

Follow all of the coupling device manufacturer’s in-structions for installation and use.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off whiledriving, the power assist for the steering will notwork. The steering will be much harder to oper-ate.

The power assisted steering is designed to use ahydraulic pump driven by the engine, to assist steer-ing.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you willstill have control of the vehicle. However, greatersteering effort is needed, especially in sharp turnsand at low speeds.

SSD0822

POWER STEERING SYSTEM


The brake system has two separate hydraulic cir-cuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still havebraking ability at two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a sound whenthe brake pedal is fully depressed slowly. This is nota malfunction and indicates that the brake assistmechanism is operating properly.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakesThe brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the ve-hicle by depressing the footbrake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the footbrake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle. The stopping distancewill be longer.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driv-ing, the power assisted brakes will not function.Braking will be harder.

WARNING

Do not coast with the engine stopped.

Using brakesAvoid resting your foot on the footbrake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake linings/pads faster, and increase fuel con-sumption.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakesfrom overheating, reduce speed and downshift to alower gear before going down a slope or long grade.

Overheated brakes may reduce braking perfor-mance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful whenbraking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt brak-ing or acceleration could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driven through wa-ter, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your brak-ing distance will be longer and the vehicle may pullto one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speedwhile lightly depressing the footbrake pedal to heatup the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to nor-mal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds untilthe brakes function correctly.

BRAKE ASSISTWhen the force applied to the brake pedal exceedsa certain level, the Brake Assist is activated gener-ating greater braking force than a conventional brakebooster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist brakingoperation and is not a collision warning or avoid-ance device. It is the driver’s responsibility tostay alert, drive safely and be in control of thevehicle at all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophis-ticated device, but it cannot prevent accidentsresulting from careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain vehicle controlduring braking on slippery surfaces. Rememberthat stopping distances on slippery surfaces willbe longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS.Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are usingtyre chains. Always maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driveris responsible for safety.

Tyre type and condition may also affect brakingeffectiveness.

– When replacing tyres, install the specified sizeof tyres on all four wheels.

– When installing a spare tyre, make sure that itis the proper size and type as specified on thetyre placard. (See “Tyre placard” in the“9. Technical information” section.)

– For detailed information, see “Wheels andtyres” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hard brak-ing or when braking on slippery surfaces. The sys-tem detects the rotation speed at each wheel andvaries the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel

BRAKE SYSTEM


from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheelfrom locking, the system helps the driver maintainsteering control and helps to minimise swerving andspinning on slippery surfaces.

Using systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depressthe brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but donot pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to pre-vent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle toavoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may re-sult in increased stopping distances.

Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature that teststhe system each time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. Thisis normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If thecomputer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABSoff and illuminates the ABS warning light on theinstrument panel. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABSwarning light illuminates during the self-test or whiledriving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

Normal operationThe ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10 km/h (3to 6 MPH). The speed varies according to road con-ditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies andreleases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar topumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel apulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise fromunder the bonnet or feel a vibration from the actua-tor when it is operating. This is normal and indicatesthat the ABS is operating properly. However, thepulsation may indicate that road conditions are haz-ardous and extra care is required while driving.

When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:

• Always take the key with you - even when leav-ing the vehicle in your own garage.

• Close all windows completely and lock all doors.

• Always park your vehicle where it can be seen.Park in a well lit area during the night.

• If the security system is equipped, use it - evenfor a short period.

• Never leave children or pets in the vehicle unat-tended.

• Never leave valuables inside the vehicle. Alwaystake valuables with you.

• Never leave the vehicle documents in the ve-hicle.

• Never leave articles on a roof rack. Remove themfrom the rack and keep and lock them inside thevehicle.

• Never leave the spare key in the vehicle.

VEHICLE SECURITY


WARNING

• Whatever the condition, drive with caution.Accelerate and decelerate with great care. Ifaccelerating or decelerating too fast, the drivewheels will lose even more traction.

• Allow more stopping distance in cold weatherdriving. Braking should be started sooner thanon dry pavement.

• Keep at a greater distance from the vehicle infront of you on slippery roads.

• Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very coldsnow and ice can be slick and very difficult todrive on. The vehicle will have a lot less trac-tion or grip under these conditions. Try toavoid driving on wet ice until the road is saltedor sanded.

• Watch for slippery spots (glaring ice). Thesemay appear on an otherwise clear road inshaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead,brake before reaching it. Try not to brake whileactually on the ice, and avoid any suddensteering manoeuvres.

• Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

• Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas underyour vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaustpipe and from around your vehicle.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freezeand damage the battery. To maintain maximum effi-ciency, the battery should be checked regularly. Fordetails, see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLANTIf the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze,drain the cooling system, including the engine block.Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see“Engine cooling system” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TYRE EQUIPMENT1. If you have snow tyres installed on the front/rear

wheels of your vehicle, they should be of thesame size, loading range, construction and type(bias, bias-belted or radial) as the rear/front ty-res.

2. If the vehicle is to be operated in severe winterconditions, snow tyres should be installed on allfour wheels.

3. For additional traction on icy roads, studded ty-res may be used. However, some countries,provinces and states prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tyres.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snowtyres, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer thanthat of non-studded snow tyres.

4. Snow chains may be used if desired. Make surethey are the proper size for the tyres on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. Use chain tension-ers when recommended by the tyre chain manu-facturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links ofthe tyre chains must be secured or removed toprevent the possibility of whipping action dam-age to the fenders or underbody. In addition,drive at a reduced speed, otherwise, your ve-hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following items be car-ried in the vehicle during the winter:

• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove iceand snow from the windows.

• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jackto give it firm support.

• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

Engine block heater (where fitted)

WARNING

Do not use the heater with an ungrounded elec-trical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.You can be injured by an electrical shock if youuse an ungrounded connection.

An engine block heater to assist in extreme coldtemperature starting is available through a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


PARKING BRAKEWhen parking in the area where the outside tem-perature is below 0°C (32°F), do not apply the park-ing brake to prevent it from freezing. For safe park-ing:

• Place the selector lever in the P (Park) position.

• Securely block the wheels.

CORROSION PROTECTIONChemicals used for road surface deicing are ex-tremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion andthe deterioration of underbody components such asthe exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brakecables, floor pan and fenders.

In the winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically. For additional information, see “Cor-rosion protection” in the “7. Appearance andcare” section of this manual.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion,which may be required in some areas, consult aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.


NOTE


6 In case of emergencyIn case of emergency

Flat tyre ................................................................... 6-2Stopping vehicle ................................................. 6-2Preparing tools ................................................... 6-3Changing flat tyre ............................................... 6-3

Jump starting ........................................................... 6-6

Push starting ........................................................... 6-8Engine overheat....................................................... 6-8Tow truck towing ..................................................... 6-9

Towing precautions ............................................ 6-9Towing recommended by NISSAN ..................... 6-9

In case of a flat tyre, follow the instructions in thissection.

STOPPING VEHICLE

WARNING

• Be sure to apply the parking brake firmly.

• Be sure to move the selector lever to the P(Park) position.

• Never change or repair a tyre when the ve-hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery area. This ishazardous.

• Never change or repair a tyre when the on-coming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait forprofessional road assistance.

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road, away fromtraffic.

2. Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights.

3. Park on a level surface.



6. Turn off the engine.

7. Open the bonnet and set up the triangle reflector(where fitted) in order to:

• Warn other traffic.

• Signal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

8. Have all passengers exit the vehicle and stand ina safe place, away from traffic and clear of thevehicle.

SCE0728

Type A

SCE0715Z


FLAT TYRE

6-2 In case of emergency

PREPARING TOOLS

Type ARemove the cargo floor board.

Type BTurn the clips anticlockwise and remove the lug-gage floor box.

Remove the strap from the back side of the boardj1 , and hang it on the edge of the luggage roomopening j2 .

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tyre. Carefullyread the instructions provided in the appropriatesection.

For model with spare tyre: See “Changing flat tyre”later in this section.

CHANGING FLAT TYRERemove jacking tools and the spare tyre located atthe bottom of the luggage compartment as illus-trated.

Blocking wheels

WARNING

Be sure to block the appropriate wheel to pre-vent the vehicle from moving, which may causepersonal injury.

Place suitable blocks j1 at both the front and backof the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre jA toprevent the vehicle from moving when it is jackedup.

SCE0713Z


SCE0716Z

SCE0700Z

MCE0001DZ

In case of emergency 6-3

Removing tyre

WARNING

• Be sure to read and follow the instructions inthis section.

• Do not get under a vehicle that is supportedonly by a jack: Use vehicle support stands.

• Never use a jack which was not provided withyour vehicle.

• The jack, which is provided with your vehicle,is designed only to lift your vehicle during atyre change.

• Never jack up the vehicle at a location otherthan the jack-up point that is specified.

• Never lift the vehicle more than necessary.

• Never use blocks on or under the jack.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicleis on the jack. The vehicle may move sud-denly, and this may cause an accident.

• Never allow passengers to remain in the ve-hicle while the tyre is off the ground.

• Be sure to read the caution label attached tothe jack body before using.

SCE0572Z

Jack-up points


Jacking up vehicle:

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point asillustrated so that the top of the jack contacts thevehicle at the jack-up point.

The jack should be placed on firm levelground.

2. Align the jack head between the two notcheslocated at the jack-up point of either the front orthe rear section.

3. Fit the groove of the jack head between thenotches as shown.

4. Loosen each wheel nut, anticlockwise, one ortwo turns with the wheel nut wrench.

Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tyre isoff the ground.

5. Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance be-tween the tyre and ground is achieved.

6. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands and turn the jack lever.

Removing tyre:

1. Remove the wheel nuts.

2. Remove the damaged tyre.

CAUTION

The tyre is heavy. Be sure that your feet are clearfrom the tyre and use gloves as necessary toavoid injury.

Installing spare tyre

WARNING

• Never use wheel nuts which are not providedwith your vehicle. Incorrect wheel nuts or im-properly tightened wheel nuts may cause thewheel to become loose or come off. Thiscould cause an accident.

• Never use oil or grease on the wheel studs ornuts. This may cause the wheel nuts to be-come loose.

• The T-type spare tyre is designed for emer-gency use only.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface betweenthe wheel and hub.

2. Carefully fit the spare tyre and tighten the wheelnuts with your fingers. Check that all the wheelnuts contact the wheel surface horizontally.

SCE0751Z SCE0039Z


3. Tighten the wheel nuts alternately and evenly inthe sequence illustrated (j1 - j5 ), more than 2times with the wheel nut wrench, until they aretight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tyre touchesthe ground.

5. Tighten the wheel nuts securely, with the wheelnut wrench, in the sequence illustrated.

6. Lower the vehicle completely.

Tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:108 N•m (11 kg-m, 80 ft-lb)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to speci-fication at all times. It is recommended that thewheel nuts be tightened to specification at eachlubrication interval.

WARNING

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle hasbeen driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also incase of a flat tyre, etc.).

Stowing damaged tyre and tools

WARNING

Be sure that the tyre, jack and tools are properlystored after use. Such items can become dan-gerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

1. Securely store the damaged tyre, jack and toolsin the storage area.

2. Close the luggage floor board.

3. Close the back door.

WARNING

• Incorrect jump starting can lead to a batteryexplosion. The battery explosion may result insevere injury or death. It may also result indamage to the vehicle. Be sure to follow theinstructions in this section.

• Explosive hydrogen gas is always present inthe vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks andflames away from the battery.

• Always wear suitable eye protection and re-move rings, bracelets, and any other jewellerywhenever working on or near a battery.

• Never lean over the battery while jump start-ing.

• Never allow battery fluid to come into contactwith eyes, skin, clothes or the vehicle’spainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosivesulphuric acid which can cause severe burns.If the fluid comes into contact with anything,immediately flush the contacted area withplenty of water.

• Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

• The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts.Use of an incorrectly rated battery will dam-age your vehicle.

• Never attempt to jump start a frozen battery.It could explode and cause serious injury.

JUMP STARTING


1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle jB ,position the two vehicles jA and jB to bring thebatteries into close proximity to each other.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

• If the battery is discharged, the steering wheelwill lock and cannot be turned with the igni-tion switch in the “OFF” position. Supplypower using jumper cables before pushingthe ignition switch to any position other thanthe “OFF” position and disengaging the steer-ing lock.



4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).


6. Remove the vent caps (where fitted) on the bat-tery.

7. Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moistcloth to reduce the hazard of an explosion.

8. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence asillustrated (j1 , j2 , j3 , j4 ).

CAUTION

• Always connect positive j+ to positive j+ andnegative j- to body ground, NOT to the bat-tery’s negative j- .

• Be sure that the jumper cables do not touchmoving parts in the engine compartment.

• Be sure that the jumper cable’s clamps donot contact any other metal.

9. Start the engine of the booster vehicle jB and letit run for a few minutes.

10. Depress the accelerator pedal of the boostervehicle jB at about 2,000 rpm.

11. Start the engine of the jumped vehicle jA in thenormal manner.

CAUTION

Never keep the starter motor engaged for morethan 10 seconds. If the engine does not startright away, push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and wait at least 10 seconds before try-ing again.

12. After starting the engine of your vehicle, care-fully disconnect the jumper cables in the oppo-site sequence from that illustrated (j4 , j3 , j2 ,j1 ).

13. Remove and dispose of the cloth properly as itmay be contaminated with corrosive acid.

14. Replace the vent caps, if removed.

SCE0719Z


Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing thevehicle.

CAUTION

• Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)model cannot be started by pushing. Attempt-ing to do so may cause damage to the trans-mission.

• Three-way catalyst equipped models shouldnot be started by pushing. Attempting to doso may cause damage to the three-way cata-lyst.

• Never try to start the engine by towing. Whenthe engine starts, the forward surge couldcause the vehicle to collide with the towingvehicle.

WARNING

• Never continue driving if the engine of yourvehicle overheats. Doing so could cause en-gine damage and/or a vehicle fire.

• Never open the bonnet if steam is comingout.

• Never remove the radiator cap while the en-gine is hot. If the radiator cap is removed whenthe engine is hot, pressurised hot water willspurt out and possibly cause burning, scald-ing or serious injury.

• If steam or coolant is coming from the engine,stand clear of the vehicle to prevent gettingscalded.

• The engine cooling fan will start whenever thecoolant temperature exceeds preset degrees.

• Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jew-ellery or clothing to come into contact with, orto get caught in the cooling fan or drive belts.

If the engine of your vehicle is overheating (indi-cated by the high temperature indicator), or if youfeel a lack of engine power, detect unusual noise,etc., take the following steps:

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away fromtraffic.

2. Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.



DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE.

5. Open all the windows.

6. Turn off the air conditioner. Set the temperaturecontrol to maximum hot and the fan control tohigh speed.

7. Exit the vehicle.

8. Visually inspect and listen for steam or coolantescaping from the radiator before opening thebonnet. Wait until no steam or coolant can beseen before proceeding.

9. Open the engine bonnet.

10. Visually inspect if the cooling fan is running.

11. Visually inspect the radiator and radiator hosesfor leakage. If the cooling fan is not running orthe coolant is leaking, stop the engine.

12. After the engine cools down, check the coolantlevel in the reservoir with the engine running.Do not open the radiator cap.

13. Add coolant to the reservoir if necessary.

14. Securely close the bonnet.

Have your vehicle inspected/repaired at a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

PUSH STARTING ENGINE OVERHEAT


When towing your vehicle, local regulations for tow-ing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipmentcould damage your vehicle. To assure proper tow-ing and to prevent accidental damage to your ve-hicle, NISSAN recommends that you have profes-sional road assistance personnel tow your vehicle. Itis advisable to have the professional road assistantcarefully read the following precautions.

TOWING PRECAUTIONSAlways attach safety chains before towing.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Towing Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies be usedunder the front or rear wheels when towing yourvehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flatbed towtruck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels onthe ground. Doing so will cause serious and ex-pensive damage to the powertrain.

SCE0736Z

TOW TRUCK TOWING


Freeing trapped vehicle

WARNING

• Never allow anyone to stand near the towingline during the pulling operation.

• Never spin the tyres at high speed. This couldcause them to explode and result in seriousinjury. Parts of the vehicle could also overheatand be damaged.

• Do not pull the vehicle using the rear hookj2 . The rear hook is not designed to pull thevehicle out in the event that the vehicle be-comes trapped.

In the event that your vehicle’s tyres become trappedin sand, snow, or mud, and the vehicle is unable tofree itself without being pulled, use the recoveryhook j1 (stored with jacking tools).

• Use the recovery hooks only. Do not attach thepulling device to any other part of the vehiclebody. Otherwise, the vehicle body may be dam-aged.

• Use the recovery hooks to free a vehicle only.Never tow a vehicle using only the recoveryhooks.

• The recovery hooks are under tremendous stresswhen used to free a trapped vehicle. Always pullthe pulling device straight out from the vehicle.Never pull on the recovery hooks at an angle.

Front:

Remove the recovery hook cover from the frontbumper using an appropriate tool.

Securely install the recovery hook j1 (stored withjacking tools) to the attaching mount located on thefront bumper. If the number plate and/or numberplate bracket prevents recovery hook installation,remove it temporarily using a suitable tool.

Make sure that the recovery hook is properly se-cured in its storage location after use and the num-ber plate is properly reinstalled before driving thevehicle.

SCE0717A

Front

SCE0795

Rear (Except for Europe)

SCE0718B

Rear (For Europe)


Rear:

Except for Europe: Do not use the rear hook j2 topull the vehicle.

For Europe: The rear hook j3 is designed as therecovery hook.


NOTE


7 Appearance and careAppearance and care

Cleaning exterior...................................................... 7-2Washing............................................................. 7-2Removing spots.................................................. 7-2Waxing ............................................................... 7-2Glass ................................................................. 7-3Underbody ......................................................... 7-3Wheels............................................................... 7-3Cleaning alloy wheels ......................................... 7-3Chrome parts ..................................................... 7-3

Cleaning interior ...................................................... 7-3

Floor mats .......................................................... 7-4Glass ................................................................. 7-4Seat belts ........................................................... 7-4

Corrosion protection................................................ 7-4Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion ............................................................ 7-4Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion ............................................................ 7-4To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................ 7-5

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle,it is important to take proper care of it.

Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a ga-rage or in a covered area to minimise the chancesof damaging the paint surface of your vehicle.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shadyarea or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Becareful not to scratch the paint surface when put-ting on or removing the body cover.

WASHINGIn the following instances, wash your vehicle as soonas possible to protect the paint surface:

• After a rainfall, which may cause the paint sur-face damage from acid rain.

• After driving on coastal roads, which may causerusting from the sea breeze.

• When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get onthe paint surface.

• When dust or mud builds up on the paint sur-face.

1. Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge andplenty of water.

2. Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughlyusing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or ageneral purpose dishwashing liquid mixed withclean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

• Do not wash the vehicle with strong house-hold soap, strong chemical detergents, petrolor solvents.

• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight orwhile the vehicle body is hot, as the paint sur-face may become water-spotted.

• Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths,such as washing mitts. Care must be takenwhen removing caked-on dirt or other foreignsubstances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

3. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

4. Use a dampened chamois to dry the paint sur-face and avoid leaving water spots.

When washing the vehicle, take care of the follow-ing:

• Inside flanges, joints and folds on the doors,hatches and bonnet are particularly vulnerable tothe effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly.

• Be sure that the drain holes in the lower edge ofthe doors are not clogged.

• Spray water to the underbody and in the wheelwells to loosen the dirt and/or wash away roadsalt.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paintsurface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Specialcleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop or any automotive accessorystore.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface and helpsmaintain a new vehicle appearance.

After waxing, polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up residue and to avoid a weathered appear-ance.

A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop can assistyou in choosing the appropriate waxing products.

CAUTION

• Wash your vehicle thoroughly and completelybefore applying wax to the paint surface.

• Always follow the manufacturer’s instructionssupplied with the wax.

• Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that may dam-age the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on abase coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finishor leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle is parkedin the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth willeasily remove this film.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in the winter, it isnecessary to clean the vehicle’s underbody regu-larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building upand causing the acceleration of corrosion on theunderbody and suspension.

Before the winter and again in the spring, the under-seal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

WHEELS

• Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle tomaintain their appearance.

• Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of the vehicleis washed.

• Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing thewheels.

• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corro-sion. This may cause loss of pressure or damagethe tyre bead.

• NISSAN recommends that the road wheels bewaxed to protect against road salt in areas whereit is used during winter.

CLEANING ALLOY WHEELSWash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially during win-ter in areas where road salt is used. The salt residuefrom road salt could discolour the wheels if it is notwashed off regularly.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining ordiscolouring the wheels:

• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid oralkali contents to clean the wheels.

• Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheelswhen they are hot. The wheel temperatureshould be the same as ambient temperature.

• Rinse the wheel to completely remove thecleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner isapplied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasivechrome polish to maintain the finish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaneror soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather sur-faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soapsolution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protec-tors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach theseat material.

Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens covers.

CAUTION

• Never use benzine, thinner or any similar ma-terial.

• Small dirt particles can be abrasive and dam-aging to leather surfaces and should be re-moved promptly. Do not use saddle soap, carwaxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,solvents, detergents or ammonia-basedcleaners as they damage the natural leatherfinish.

• Never use fabric protectors unless recom-mended by the manufacturer.

• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meteror gauge lens covers. It may damage the lenscovers.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats (where fit-ted) can extend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Regardless ofwhat mats are used, be sure they are fitted for yourvehicle and are properly positioned in the foot wellto prevent interference with pedal operation. Matsshould be maintained with regular cleaning and re-placed if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to actas floor mat positioning aids. NISSAN floor matshave been specially designed for your vehicle model.

Position the mat by placing the floor mat brackethooks through the floor mat grommet holes whilecentering the mat in the foot area.

Periodically check that the mats are properly posi-tioned.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle is parkedin the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth willeasily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do notuse sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlo-rine-based disinfectant cleaners. They coulddamage the electrical conductors, such as radioantenna elements or rear window defogger ele-ments.

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

• Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor.

• Never use bleach, dye or chemical solvents toclean the seat belts, since these materialsmay severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them witha sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade beforeusing them. (See “Seat belt maintenance” in the“1. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section.)

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

• The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt anddebris in body panel sections, cavities, and otherareas.

• Damage to the paint surface and other protec-tive coatings caused by gravel and stone chipsor minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

MoistureThe accumulation of sand, dirt and water on theinside floor of the vehicle can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor carpet/floor mats will not dry completelyinside the vehicle. They should be removed andcompletely dried to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas of high rela-tive humidity.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosionto those parts which are not well ventilated.

Corrosion will also be accelerated in areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing.

SAI0042Z

CORROSION PROTECTION


Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air incoastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceleratesthe corrosion process. Road salt also acceleratesthe disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

• Always check for minor damage to the paint sur-face and if any exists, repair it as soon as pos-sible.

• Keep the drain holes in the lower edge of thedoors open to avoid water accumulation.

• Check the vehicle underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

• Never remove dirt, sand or other debris fromthe passenger compartment by washing it outwith a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuumcleaner or broom.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come incontact with electronic components inside thevehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are ex-tremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and

deterioration of underbody components such as theexhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,floor pan and fenders.

In the winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion,which may be required in some areas, consult aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Appearance and care 7-5

NOTE


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourselfMaintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements ....................................... 8-2Scheduled maintenance...................................... 8-2General maintenance.......................................... 8-2Where to go for service ...................................... 8-2

General maintenance............................................... 8-2Explanation of general maintenance items ........... 8-2Maintenance precautions .................................... 8-4

Engine compartment................................................ 8-5Engine cooling system ............................................. 8-5

Changing engine coolant .................................... 8-5Engine oil................................................................. 8-6

Checking engine oil level .................................... 8-6Changing engine oil and oil filter ......................... 8-6Protect environment............................................ 8-8

Drive belts ............................................................... 8-9Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-9

Iridium-tipped spark plugs................................... 8-9Brakes..................................................................... 8-9

Checking parking brake...................................... 8-9Checking footbrake ............................................ 8-10Brake booster..................................................... 8-10

Brake fluid ............................................................... 8-10Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid........ 8-11Power steering fluid ................................................. 8-11Air cleaner filter........................................................ 8-12

Wiper blades ........................................................... 8-12Windscreen wiper blades ................................... 8-12

Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-14Battery..................................................................... 8-14

Vehicle battery.................................................... 8-15Intelligent Key battery.......................................... 8-16

Variable voltage control system ................................ 8-17Fuses ...................................................................... 8-17

Engine compartment........................................... 8-17Passenger compartment ..................................... 8-18

Lights ...................................................................... 8-18Headlights .......................................................... 8-18Exterior lights...................................................... 8-19Interior lights....................................................... 8-19Light locations .................................................... 8-20

Wheels and tyres..................................................... 8-25Tyre inflation pressure......................................... 8-25Types of tyres..................................................... 8-25Snow chains....................................................... 8-26Tyre rotation ....................................................... 8-26Tyre wear and damage ....................................... 8-26Tyre age ............................................................. 8-26Changing tyres and wheels................................. 8-27Wheel balance.................................................... 8-27Spare tyre .......................................................... 8-27

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with longer serviceintervals, to save you both time and money. How-ever, some day-to-day and regular maintenance isessential to maintain your NISSAN’s good mechani-cal condition, as well as its emission and engineperformance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that thespecified maintenance, as well as general mainte-nance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who canensure that your vehicle receives the proper mainte-nance care.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEFor your convenience, the required scheduled main-tenance items are described and listed in the sepa-rately provided Warranty Information & Maintenancebooklet. You must refer to that booklet to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN vehicle at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCEGeneral maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day opera-tion of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicleis to continue to operate properly. It is your respon-sibility to perform these procedures regularly as pre-scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and a few general automo-tive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by your-self, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, yourNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICEIf maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the vehicle checkedand tuned by an authorised NISSAN dealer or quali-fied workshop.

During normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle,general maintenance should be performed regularlyas prescribed in this section. If you detect any un-usual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to checkfor the cause or have a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop do it promptly. In addition, you shouldnotify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs arerequired.

When performing any checks or maintenance work,closely observe “Maintenance precautions” later inthis section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMSAdditional information on the following items with“*” is found later in this section.

Outside vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should be per-formed from time to time, unless otherwise speci-fied.

Doors and engine bonnet:

Check that all doors including the back door andengine bonnet operate properly. Also make surethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges andlatches if necessary. Make sure that the secondarylatch of the engine bonnet keeps the bonnet fromopening when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other cor-rosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Lights*:

Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make surethat the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signallights, and other lights are all operating properly andinstalled securely. Also check the aim of the head-lights.

Tyres*:

Check the pressure with a gauge often and alwaysprior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust thepressure in all tyres, including the spare, to the pres-sure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts orexcessive wear.

Tyre rotation*:

Tyres should be rotated every 5,000 km (3,000miles) for Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models.

However, the timing for tyre rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits and the road surfaceconditions.

Wheel alignment and balance:

If the vehicle should pull to either side while drivingon a straight and level road, or if you detect unevenor abnormal tyre wear, there may be a need forwheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-way speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

Windscreen:

Clean the windscreen on a regular basis. Check thewindscreen at least every six months for cracks orother damage. Have a damaged windscreen re-paired by a qualified repair facility.

Wiper blades*:

Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-erly.

Inside vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when perform-ing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal:

Check the pedal for smooth operation and makesure that the pedal does not catch or require uneveneffort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.

Brake pedal*:

Check the pedal for smooth operation and makesure that it has the proper distance under it whendepressed fully. Check the brake booster function.Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.

Parking brake*:

Check that the pedal has the proper distance oftravel.

Seat belts:

Check that all parts of the seat belt system (forexample, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retrac-tors) operate properly and smoothly, and that theyare installed securely. Check the belt webbing forcuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel:

Check for changes in the steering conditions, suchas excessive free play, hard steering or strangenoises.

Warning lights and chimes:

Make sure that all warning lights and chimes areoperating properly.

Windscreen defogger:

Check that the air comes out of the defogger outletsproperly and in good quantity when operating theheater or air conditioner.

Windscreen wiper and washer*:

Check that the wipers and washers operate prop-erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under bonnet and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*:

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be be-tween the UPPER and LOWER levels. Vehicles op-erated in high temperatures or under severe condi-tions require frequent checks of the battery fluidlevel.

Brake fluid level*:

Make sure that the brake fluid level is between theMAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*:

Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*:

Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn,cracked or oily.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Engine oil level*:

Check the level on the dipstick after parking thevehicle on a level surface and turning off the engine.

Fluid leaks:

Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or otherfluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for awhile. Water dripping from the air conditioner afteruse is normal. If you should notice any leaks or ifpetrol fumes are evident, check for the cause andhave it corrected immediately.

Window washer fluid*:

Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONSWhen performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precautionswhich should be closely observed.

WARNING

• Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply theparking brake securely and block the wheelsto prevent the vehicle from moving. Move theselector lever to the P (Park) position.

• Be sure the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition when performing any parts replace-ment or repairs.

• Do not work under the bonnet while the en-gine is hot. Always turn off the engine andwait until it cools down.

• If you must work with the engine running,keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools awayfrom moving fans, belts and any other movingparts.

• It is advisable to secure or remove any looseclothing and any jewellery, such as rings,watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

• If you must run the engine in an enclosedspace such as a garage, be sure there isproper ventilation for exhaust gases to es-cape.

• Never get under the vehicle while it is sup-ported only by a jack. If it is necessary to workunder the vehicle, support it with safetystands.

• Keep smoking materials, flame and sparksaway from fuel and the battery.

• Never connect or disconnect either the bat-tery or any transistorised component connec-tor while the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

• On petrol engine models with the MultiportFuel Injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter andfuel lines should be serviced by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop because the fuellines are under high pressure even when theengine is turned off.

• Your vehicle is equipped with an automaticengine cooling fan. It may come on at anytime without warning, even if the ignitionswitch is in the “OFF” position and the engine

is not running. To avoid injury, always discon-nect the negative battery cable before work-ing near the fan.

• Always wear eye protection whenever youwork on your vehicle.

• Never leave the engine or the transmissionrelated component harness connectordisconnected while the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

• Avoid direct contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, en-gine coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids canhurt the environment. Always conform to lo-cal regulations for disposal of vehicle fluids.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionprovides instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties or ex-cessive emissions, and could affect your warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have itdone by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.


For an overview of the engine compartment, see“Engine compartment” in the “0. Illustrated table ofcontents” section

WARNING

• Never remove the radiator or coolant reser-voir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burnscould be caused by high-pressure fluid es-caping from the radiator. Wait until the engineand radiator cool down.

• Engine coolant is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containers out ofthe reach of children.

The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolantsolution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust andcorrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling sys-tem additives are not necessary.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to useonly Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equiva-lent in its quality with the proper mixture ratio.

Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalentin its quality. Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant is apre-mixed (mixture ratio 50%) type coolant.

The use of other types of coolant solutions maydamage the engine cooling system.

The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. Toprevent engine damage, use only a GenuineNISSAN radiator cap or its equivalent when replace-ment is required.

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when theengine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MINlevel j2 , add coolant up to the MAX level j1 . If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator withcoolant up to the radiator filler cap above the radia-tor upper hose opening and also add it to the reser-voir up to the MAX level j1 . Tighten the cap se-curely after adding engine coolant.

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant,have it checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTContact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop ifreplacement is required.

Major engine cooling system repair should be per-formed by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.The service procedures can be found in the appro-priate NISSAN Service Manual.

SDI2173Z

ENGINE COMPARTMENT ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


Improper servicing can result in reduced heater per-formance and engine overheating.

WARNING

• To avoid being scalded, never change thecoolant when the engine is hot.

• Never remove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot. Serious burns could be caused byhigh pressure fluid escaping from the radia-tor.

• Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. Ifskin contact is made, wash thoroughly withsoap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

• Keep coolant out of reach of children andpets.


Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Checkyour local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the

parking brake.

2. Start the engine and warm it up until the enginetemperature reaches the normal operating tem-perature (approximately 5 minutes).

3. Stop the engine.

4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil todrain back to the oil pan.

5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way.

7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level. Itshould be within the range j1 .

8. If the oil level is below j2 , remove the oil fillercap and pour the recommended oil into the open-ing. Do not overfill j3 .

9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.

CAUTION

• The oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating your vehicle with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by the warranty.

• It is normal to add some oil between oil main-tenance intervals or during the running-inschedule, depending on the severity of oper-ating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OILFILTER

WARNING


Used oil must be disposed of properly. Neverpour or dump oil into the ground, canals, riv-ers, etc. It should be disposed of at properwaste facilities. We recommend having youroil changed by a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

• Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engineoil may be hot.

• Prolonged and repeated contact with usedengine oil may cause skin cancer.

• Avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If con-tacted, wash thoroughly with soap or handcleaner and plenty of water as soon as pos-sible.

• Store used engine oil in marked containersout of the reach of children.

SDI2174Z

ENGINE OIL


Vehicle set-up1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the

parking brake.

2. Start the engine and warm it up until the enginetemperature reaches the normal operating tem-perature (approximately 5 minutes).

3. Stop the engine.

4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil todrain back to the oil pan.

5. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitablefloor jack and safety jack stands.

• Place the safety jack stands under the vehiclejack-up points.

• A suitable adapter should be attached to thejack stand saddle.

Engine oil and filter1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug jA .

2. Remove the drain plug with a wrench.

3. Remove the oil filler cap jB and completely drainthe oil.

SDI2175 SDI2176



Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Checkyour local regulations.

4. (Perform steps 4 to 8 only when the engine oil fil-ter change is needed.)

Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter loca-tion by removing the small plastic clips as illus-trated.

5. Loosen the oil filter jC with an oil filter wrench.

6. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

7. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with aclean cloth.

Be sure to remove any old gasket remainingon the mounting surface.

8. Apply new engine oil to the gasket of a new oilfilter.

9. Install the oil filter clockwise until a slight resis-tance is felt, and then tighten additionally morethan 2/3 turn to secure the oil filter.Oil filter tightening torque:

15 to 20 N•m(1.5 to 2.0 kg-m, 11 to 15 ft-lb)

10. Install the plastic cover.

11. Clean and reinstall the drain plug along with anew washer. Securely tighten the drain plugwith a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:29 to 39 N•m(3.0 to 4.0 kg-m, 22 to 29 ft-lb)

12. Sufficiently refill with the recommended engineoil. (See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical information”section.)

13. Securely install the oil filler cap.

14. Start the engine.

15. Check the drain plug and the oil filter for anysign of leakage. Correct as required.

16. Stop the engine.

17. Wait at least 10 minutes. Check the engine oillevel according to the proper procedure. (See“Checking engine oil level” earlier in this sec-tion.) Add engine oil if necessary.

After operation1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

PROTECT ENVIRONMENTNISSAN GREEN PROGRAM

It is illegal to pollute drains, watercourses and soil.Use authorised waste collection facilities, includingcivil amenity sites and garages providing facilitiesfor disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If indoubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-posal.

The regulations concerning the pollution of theenvironment will vary from country to country.


1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Alternator

3. Drive belt auto-tensioner

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-tion.

Visually inspect belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts,fraying or looseness. Check the condition regularly.If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it re-placed or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are offand that the parking brake is applied.

Replace spark plugs according to the maintenanceschedule. For details, see the separately providedWarranty Information & Maintenance Booklet.

If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop.

IRIDIUM-TIPPED SPARK PLUGSIt is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped sparkplugs as frequently as the conventional type of sparkplugs. These spark plugs are designed to last muchlonger than the conventional type of spark plug.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse the iridium-tipped spark plugsby cleaning or re-gapping.

• Always replace with the recommended iri-dium-tipped spark plugs.

CHECKING PARKING BRAKEFrom the released position, depress the parkingbrake pedal slowly and firmly. If the number of clicksis out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer orqualified workshop.

5 to 6 clicks under a depressing force of 196N (44 lb)

SDI2186Z

VQ35DE engine

SDI2020Z

SDI1391DZ

DI1020MMZ

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS BRAKES


CHECKING FOOTBRAKE

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for abrake system check if the brake pedal heightdoes not return to normal.

With the engine running, check the distance be-tween the upper surface of the pedal and the metalfloor. If it is out the range listed, see a NISSANdealer.

Depressing force490 N (110 lb)

Except for Russia:— 115 mm (4–1/2 in) or more

For Russia:— 105 mm (4-1/8 in) or more

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the foot-brake pedal is applied.

Brake pad wear indicatorThe disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires replace-ment, it will make a high pitched scraping orscreeching sound when the vehicle is in motion. Thenoise will be heard whether or not the footbrakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeaks, squeals or other noises may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should befollowed. For additional information, see the sepa-rately provided Warranty Information & Maintenancebooklet.

BRAKE BOOSTERCheck the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, depress and release the foot-brake pedal several times. When the footbrakepedal movement (distance of travel) remains thesame from one pedal application to the next, con-tinue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the footbrake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the footbrake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30seconds. The pedal height should not change.

4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressingthe footbrake pedal, then turn it off. Depress thefootbrake pedal several times. The pedal traveldistance will decrease gradually with each de-pression as the vacuum is released from thebooster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

WARNING

• Use only new fluid from a sealed container.Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may dam-age the brake system. The use of improperfluids can damage the brake system and af-fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

• Clean the filler cap before removing.

• Brake fluid is poisonous and should be storedcarefully in marked containers out of the reachof children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the brake fluid on painted surfaces.This will damage the paint. If brake fluid is spilled,wash it off with plenty of water immediately.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brakefluid is below the MIN line j2 , the brake warninglight will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAXline j1 . (See “Capacities and recommended

SDI2178Z

BRAKE FLUID


fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical information” sec-tion for the recommended types of brake fluid.)

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brakesystem should be thoroughly checked by a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop ifchecking or replacement is required.

CAUTION

• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Donot mix with other fluids.

• Using transmission fluid other than GenuineNISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVTtransmission, which is not covered by the war-ranty.

WARNING

Power steering fluid is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containers out of thereach of children.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The fluid levelshould be checked in the HOT range (j1 : HOTMAX./j3 : HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 50 to80°C (122 to 176°F) or in the COLD range (j2 :COLD MAX./j3 : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperaturesof 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).

If it is necessary to add fluid, use only specified fluid.(See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubri-cants” in the “9. Technical information” section.) Donot overfill.

SDI2177Z

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID


WARNING

• Operating the engine without air cleaner fil-ter, can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air,it also stops flame if the engine backfires. Ifthe air cleaner filter is not installed and theengine backfires, you could be burned.

• Never drive with the air cleaner filter off.

• Be careful when working on the engine with-out the air cleaner filter.

To remove the filter, pull the clips j1 , and pull outthe cover j2 .

The viscous paper type filter element should not becleaned and reused. The dry paper type filter ele-ment may be cleaned and reused. Replace the airfilter according to the maintenance schedule shownin the separately provided Warranty Information &Maintenance booklet.

When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the aircleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES

CleaningIf the windscreen does not become clear after usingthe windscreen washer or if the wiper blades chat-ter when operating the windscreen wipers, wax orother materials may be on the windscreen and/orwiper blades.

Clean the outside of the windscreen surface with awasher solution or mild detergent. The windscreenis clean if beads do not form when rinsing with wa-ter.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in awasher solution or a mild detergent. Rinse the bladewith water. If the windscreen is still not clear aftercleaning the blades and using the wipers, replacethe blades.

SDI2180Z

AIR CLEANER FILTER WIPER BLADES


If you wax the surface of the bonnet, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may clogthe nozzle jA , which could cause improper wind-screen washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle,unclog it with a needle or small pin jB .

ReplacingReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push and hold the release tab jA , and then movethe wiper blade down j1 the wiper arm to re-move.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper armuntil it clicks into place.

CAUTION

• After wiper blade replacement, return thewiper arm to its original position. Otherwisethe wiper arm or the engine bonnet may bescratched and may cause damage.

• Worn windscreen wiper blades can damagethe windscreen and impair driver vision.

SDI2199

SDI2048Z


WARNING

Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be storedcarefully in marked containers out of the reach ofchildren.

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning lightilluminates.

Add a washer solvent to the water for better clean-ing. In the winter season, add a windscreen washerantifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor the mixture ratio.

SDI2179Z

Caution symbols for battery m WARNING

j1 mNo smoking

No exposed flamesNo sparks

Never smoke around the battery. Never expose the battery to open flames orelectrical sparks.

j2 m Shield eyesHandle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protectagainst explosion or battery acid.

j3 mKeep away from

childrenNever allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of reach ofchildren.

j4 m Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces.After handling the battery or battery cap, immediately wash your handsthoroughly. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, or onto your skin or clothing,flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, itcould cause eyesight loss or burns.

j5 mNote operating

instructionsBefore handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct andsafe handling.

j6 m Explosive gas Hydrogen gas, generated by battery fluid, is explosive.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY


VEHICLE BATTERY

WARNING

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the bat-tery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higherload on the battery which can generate heat, re-duce battery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

Checking battery fluid levelCheck the fluid level in each cell. The battery fluidlevel should be between the UPPER LEVEL j1 andLOWER LEVEL j2 lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only deminera-lised/distilled water to bring the level to the indicatorin each filler opening. Do not overfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs j3 using a suitable tool.

2. Add demineralised/distilled water up to the UP-PER LEVEL j1 line.

If the side of the battery is not clear, check thedistilled water level by looking directly above thecell; the condition jA indicates OK and the con-dition jB needs more to be added.

3. Replace and tighten the cell plugs.

• Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

• Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Cleanthe battery with a solution of baking soda andwater.

• Make certain the terminal connections are cleanand securely tightened.

• If the vehicle is not to be used for more than 30days, disconnect the negative (−) battery termi-nal cable to prevent battery discharge.

Jump startingIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” inthe “6. In case of emergency” section. If the enginedoes not start by jump starting or the battery doesnot charge, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop forreplacing the battery.

DI0137MDZ

SDI1480DZ


INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

Battery replacementCAUTION

• Be careful not to allow children to swallow thebattery and removed parts.


An improperly disposed battery can harm theenvironment. Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

• When changing batteries, do not let dust or oilget on the components.

• There is danger of explosion if lithium batteryis incorrectly replaced. Replace only with thesame or equivalent type.

To replace the battery:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelli-gent Key and remove the mechanical key. (See“Mechanical key” in the “3. Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section.)

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver wrapped with acloth into the slit of the corner and twist it toseparate the upper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

• Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent

• Do not touch the internal circuit and electric ter-minals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

• Make sure that the % side faces the bottom ofthe case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, andthen push them together until it is securelyclosed.

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop ifyou need assistance for battery replacement.

SDI2294Z

SDI1889AZ


The variable voltage control system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the battery andcontrols voltage generated by the alternator.

CAUTION

• Do not ground accessories directly to the bat-tery terminal. Doing so will bypass the vari-able voltage control system and the vehiclebattery may not charge completely.

• Use electrical accessories with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the vehicle bat-tery.

ENGINE COMPARTMENTCAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperagerating than that specified on the fuse box cover.This could damage the electrical system or causea fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, checkfor an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the “OFF”position.

3. Open the bonnet.

4. Remove the fuse/fusible link cover.

5. Locate the fuse which needs to be replaced.

6. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller. The fusepuller is located in the passenger compartmentfuse box.

7. If the fuse is open jA , replace it with a new fusejB . Spare fuses are stored in the passengercompartment fuse box.

If the new fuse opens again, after installing, have theelectrical system checked and repaired by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Fusible linksIf any electrical equipment does not operate and thefuses are in good condition, check the fusible links.If any of these fusible links are melted, replace onlywith genuine NISSAN parts.

SDI2341Z SDI1754Z

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM

FUSES


PASSENGER COMPARTMENTCAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperagerating than that specified on the fuse box cover.This could damage the electrical system or causea fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, checkfor an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the “OFF”position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Locate the fuse which needs to be replaced.

5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller jA (Left-hand drive models) or jB (Right-hand drive mod-els).

6. If the fuse is open jA , replace it with a new fusejB .

If the new fuse opens again, after installing, have theelectrical system checked and repaired by aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

HEADLIGHTSFog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exte-rior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperaturedifference between the inside and the outside of thelens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. Iflarge drops of water collect inside the lens, contacta NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Replacing xenon headlight bulb

WARNING

m HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce ahigh voltage. To prevent an electric shock, neverattempt to modify or disassemble. Always haveyour xenon headlights replaced at a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop.

CAUTION

Use the same number and wattage as originallyinstalled:

High/Low beams (Xenon)Wattage: 35Bulb no.: D2S

If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealeror qualified workshop.

SDI2342Z

SDI1754Z

LIGHTS


EXTERIOR LIGHTSItem Wattage (W)Front turn signal light 21Clearance light 5Front fog light 35Rear fog light 21Side turn signal light 5Rear turn signal light 21Rear combination light

Stop/Tail light* LEDReverse light 16

High-mounted stop light* LEDNumber plate light 5

*: See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop forreplacement.

INTERIOR LIGHTSItem Wattage (W)Map light 8Rear personal light 8Step light 8Luggage compartment light 8Vanity mirror light 2


LIGHT LOCATIONS1. Front turn signal light

2. Clearance light

3. Headlight

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Front fog light

7. Side turn signal light

8. Step light

9. Luggage compartment light (back door)

10. High-mounted stop light

11. Rear fog light

12. Number plate lights

13. Reverse light

14. Rear combination light (Turn signal/Stop/Taillight)

SDI2319


m REMOVE

m INSTALL

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

1. Remove the covers jA by removing the clipsja .

2. Remove the clips jb , and remove the clipsjc , then carefully pull the radiator grille jBforward, unfixing the clips jd .

3. Disconnect the bulb socket, and then replacethe bulb as illustrated.

SDI2306

SDI2312Z

Front turn signal light

SDI2313Z

Clearance light


To remove, push the light rightward, then pull it.

SDI2314

Front fog light

SDI2343Z

Side turn signal light


When replacing the bulbs, remove the luggage com-partment lights jA , the back door grips jB and theclips using a suitable tool, and carefully pull the backdoor inner cover jC downward to remove it.

Reverse light j1 :

1. Remove the nuts jD , then remove thecombination light jE .

2. Disconnect the bulb socket, then replace thebulb as illustrated.

Number plate light j2 :

Disconnect the bulb socket, then replace the bulbas illustrated.

1. Remove the cover jA by prying it.

2. Remove the bolts jB , then gradually pry therear combination light jC outward using a suit-able tool as illustrated.

3. Disconnect the bulb socket, then replace thebulb.

SDI2315

Reverse light/Number plate light

SDI2316Z

Rear combination light (turn signal light)


SDI2317Z

Rear fog light

SDI2030Z

Map light

SDI2031Z

Rear personal light

SDI1500BZ

Luggage compartment light

SDI2032Z

Vanity mirror light

SDI2277Z

Step light


In case of a flat tyre, see “Flat tyre” in the “6. In caseof emergency” section.

TYRE INFLATION PRESSUREPeriodically check the pressure of the tyres (includ-ing the spare). An incorrect tyre pressure may ad-versely affect tyre life and vehicle handling. The tyrepressure should be checked when tyres are COLD.Tyres are considered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than1.6 km (1 mile). COLD tyre pressures are shown onthe tyre placard affixed to the driver’s side centre pil-lar.

Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating ofthe tyre and subsequent internal damage. At highspeeds, this could result in tread separation andeven bursting of the tyre.

TYPES OF TYRESCAUTION

• When changing or replacing tyres, be sure allfour tyres are of the same type (that is, sum-mer, all season or snow) and construction.

• A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you withinformation about tyre type, size, speed ratingand availability.

Replacement tyres may have a lower speed ratingthan the factory equipped tyres, and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tyre.

All season tyresNISSAN specifies all season tyres on some modelsto provide good performance for use all year around,including snowy and icy road conditions. All seasontyres are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tyre sidewall. Snow tyres have better snowtraction than all season tyres and may be more ap-propriate in some areas.

Summer tyresNISSAN specifies summer tyres on some models toprovide superior performance on dry roads. Sum-mer tyre performance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tyres do not have the tyretraction rating M&S on the tyre sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOWor ALL SEASON tyres on all four wheels.

Snow tyresIf snow tyres are needed, it is necessary to selecttyres equivalent in size and load rating to the originalequipment tyres. If you do not, it can adversely af-fect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tyres will have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tyres and may not match thepotential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed themaximum speed rating of the tyre. If you install snowtyres, they must be the same size, brand, construc-tion and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyresmay be used. However, some states and provinces

prohibit their use. Check local, state and provinciallaws before installing studded tyres. Skid and trac-tion capabilities of studded snow tyres on wet or drysurfaces may be poorer than that of non-studdedsnow tyres.

If excessive tyre wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tyres be replaced with tyres of the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tyrepressure and wheel alignment should also bechecked and corrected as necessary. Contact aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) modelsCAUTION

• Always use tyres of the same type, size, brand,construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), andtread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to doso may result in a circumference differencebetween tyres on the front and rear axleswhich will cause excessive tyre wear and maydamage the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.

• ONLY use spare tyres specified for the 4WDmodel.

If excessive tyre wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tyres be replaced with tyres of the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tyrepressure and wheel alignment should also bechecked and corrected as necessary. Contact aNISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

WHEELS AND TYRES


SNOW CHAINSUse of snow chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installing snowchains. When installing snow chains, make sure thatthey are of proper size for the tyres on your vehicleand are installed according to the chain manufactur-er’s instructions.

Use chain tensioners when recommended by thesnow chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Looseend links of the snow chains must be secured orremoved to prevent the possibility of whipping ac-tion damage to the fenders or underbody. If pos-sible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingsnow chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/orvehicle handling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Snow chains must be installed only on the frontwheels and not on the rear wheels.

CAUTION

• Never install snow chains on a T-type sparetyre (TEMPORARY USE ONLY).

• Do not drive with snow chains on paved roadswhich are clear of snow. Driving with chains insuch conditions can cause damage to thevarious mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

TYRE ROTATION

WARNING

• After rotating the tyres, adjust the tyre pres-sure.

• Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehiclehas been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (alsoin cases of a flat tyre, etc.).

• Do not include the T-type spare tyre in tyrerotation.

• Incorrect tyre selection, fitting, care or main-tenance can affect vehicle safety with risk ofaccident and injury. If in doubt, consult aNISSAN dealer or the tyre manufacturer.

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

TYRE WEAR AND DAMAGETyres should be periodically inspected for wear,cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. Ifexcessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts arefound, the tyre should be replaced immediately.

The original tyres have a built-in tread wear indica-tor. When the wear indicator is visible, the tyreshould be replaced.

Improper service of a spare tyre may result in seri-ous personal injury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tyre, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualifiedworkshop.

TYRE AGENever use a tyre over six years old, regardless ofwhether it has been used or not.

Tyres degrade with age as well as with the vehicle

SDI1662Z SDI1663Z


usage. Have your tyres checked and balanced oftenby a repair shop or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

CHANGING TYRES AND WHEELS

WARNING

Do not install a deformed wheel or tyre even if ithas been repaired. Such wheels or tyres couldhave structural damage and could fail withoutwarning.

When replacing a tyre, use the same size, speedrating and load carrying capacity as originallyequipped. (See “Wheels and tyres” in the “9. Tech-nical information” section for recommended typesand sizes of tyres and wheels.) The use of tyresother than those recommended or the mixed use oftyres of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), or tread patterns can adverselyaffect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance,body-to-tyre clearance, snow chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumperheight. Some of these effects may lead to accidentsand could result in serious personal injury.

If the wheels are changed for any reason, alwaysreplace with wheels which have the same offsetdimension. Wheels of a different offset could causeearly tyre wear, possibly degraded vehicle handlingcharacteristics and/or interference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference can lead todecreased braking efficiency and/or early brakepad/shoe wear.

WHEEL BALANCEUnbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling andtyre life. Even with regular use, wheels can get outof balance. Therefore, they should be balanced asrequired.

SPARE TYRE

Conventional spare tyre (where fitted)A standard tire (the same size as the road wheels)is supplied with your vehicle.

Temporary-use (T-type) spare tyre(where fitted)Observe the following precautions if the T-typespare tyre must be used, otherwise your vehiclecould be damaged or involved in an accident.

CAUTION

• The T-type spare tyre should be used only foremergency. It should be replaced by the stan-dard tyre at the first opportunity.

• Drive carefully while the T-type spare tyre isinstalled.

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

• Periodically check the T-type spare tyre infla-tion pressure, and always keep it at 420 kPa(4.2 bar, 60 psi).

• Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than80 km/h (50 MPH).

• Do not use snow chains on a T-type sparetyre. Snow chains will not fit properly on theT-type spare tyre and may cause damage tothe vehicle.

• Tyre tread of the T-type spare tyre will wear ata faster rate than the original tyre. Replacethe T-type spare tyre as soon as the treadwear indicators appear.

• Because the T-type spare tyre is smaller thanthe original tyre, ground clearance is reduced.To avoid damage to the vehicle do not driveover obstacles. Also do not drive the vehiclethrough an automatic car wash since it mayget caught.

• Do not use the T-type spare tyre on other ve-hicles.

• Do not use more than one T-type spare tyre atthe same time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the spare tyre isinstalled.

SDI1912Z

Spare tyre label


NOTE


9 Technical informationTechnical information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ........... 9-2Fuel recommendation ......................................... 9-3Recommended SAE viscosity number................. 9-3Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant ... 9-3

Engine ..................................................................... 9-4Wheels and tyres..................................................... 9-4

Road wheel ........................................................ 9-4Tyre.................................................................... 9-4

Dimensions.............................................................. 9-5When travelling or transferring your registration toanother country........................................................ 9-5Vehicle identification ................................................ 9-5

Vehicle identification plate................................... 9-5Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate(where fitted) ...................................................... 9-6Vehicle identification number (chassis number) ... 9-6Engine serial number .......................................... 9-6Tyre placard ....................................................... 9-6Air conditioner specification label ........................ 9-6

Radio approval number and information ................... 9-7NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)immobilizer ......................................................... 9-7Intelligent Key system ......................................... 9-7

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill quantities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedures instructed in the “8. Maintenanceand do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Approximate Capacity Recommended Fuel/LubricantsMetric Measure Imperial Measure

Fuel 82 L 18 gal See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.Engine oil (*1) Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade (*2):

API grade SL or SMILSAC grade GF-3 or GF-4ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5, C2 or C3

Including oil filter 4.6 L 4 qt

Excluding oil filter 4.3 L 3-3/4 qt

Cooling systemGenuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality (*3)With reservoir 9.4 L 8-1/4 qt

Reservoir 0.8 L 3/4 qtCVT fluid — (*4) — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 (*5)

Transfer oil — —Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 ViscositySAE 80W-90

Power steering fluid Refill to the proper fluid level according tothe instructions in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent (*6)

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 or DOT4 (*7)

Differential gear oil — —Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 ViscositySAE 80W-90

Multi-purpose grease — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)Air conditioner system refrigerant — — HFC-134a (R-134a)Air conditioner system lubricants — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent

*1: The approximate capacities listed are for refilling during an engine oil change. For additional information, see “Changing engine oil and oil filter” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.

*2: For additional information, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section.

*3: Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant, or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminium corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuineengine coolant. Note that any repairs for incidents within the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not be covered by the warranty even ifsuch incidents occurred during the warranty period.

*4: Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for servicing.

*5: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT transmission, which is not coveredby the warranty.

*6: DEXRONTM VI type ATF can be used.

*7: Never mix different types of fluids (DOT3 or DOT4).

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Model with three-way catalystCAUTION

Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol willdamage the three-way catalyst.

VQ35DE engine models:

Use UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol with an octanerating of at least 95 (RON).

If unleaded premium petrol is not used, UNLEADEDREGULAR petrol with an octane rating of at least 91(RON) may be used at slightly reducedperformance. However, for maximum vehicle per-formance and the best driveability, the use of un-leaded premium petrol is recommended.

Outside Temperature RangeAnticipated Before Next Oil Change

ENGINE OIL

mNTI181

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER5W-30 is preferable.

If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity, fromthe chart, that is suitable for the outside tem-perature range.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTThe air conditioner system of your vehicle must becharged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R134a) andthe lubricant NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S orequivalents.

CAUTION

Use of any other refrigerants or lubricants willcause severe damage, and you may need to re-place your vehicle’s entire air conditioner sys-tem.


The release of refrigerants into the atmosphere isprohibited in many countries and regions. The re-frigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your vehicle will notharm the Earth’s ozone layer. However, it may con-tribute in a small part to the global warming effect.NISSAN recommends that the refrigerant be appro-priately recovered and recycled. Contact a NISSANdealer or qualified workshop when servicing the airconditioner system.

Technical information 9-3

ROAD WHEELType Size Offset mm (in)Aluminium 18 × 7-1/2J 50 (1.97)

TYRE

Type SizePressurePSI (kPa)[Cold]

Conventional 235/65R18 106H 33 (230)T-type T165/90D18 60 (420)

Engine type VQ35DEType Petrol, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°Bore × Stroke mm (in) 95.5 × 81.4 (3.760 × 3.205)Displacement cm3 (cu in) 3,498 (213.45)Idle speed at the N (Neutral) position rpm 600±50Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) at the N (Neutral) position 12°±2

Spark plugsWith catalyser Standard FXE22HR-11Spark plug gap mm (in) 1.1 (0.043)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

ENGINE WHEELS AND TYRES


mm (in)

Overall length 4,835 (190.4)Overall width 1,885 (74.2)Overall height 1,730 (68.1)Front tread 1,610 (63.4)Rear tread 1,610 (63.4)Wheelbase 2,825 (111.2)

When planning to travel in another country, youshould first find out if the fuel available is suitable foryour vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low octane rating may causeengine damage. Therefore, avoid taking your ve-hicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not avail-able.

When transferring your vehicle registration to an-other country, check with the appropriate authori-ties that the vehicle complies with the requirementsas it may not be possible to adapt it. In some cases,a vehicle cannot meet the legal requirements and inother cases, it may be necessary to modify the ve-hicle to meet specific laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emissioncontrol and safety standards vary according to thecountry; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

NISSAN is not responsible for any inconveniencewhen the vehicle is taken and registered into an-other country. The necessary modifications,transportation and registration are the owner’sresponsibility.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATEThe plate is affixed as shown.

STI0441Z

STI0334Z

DIMENSIONS WHEN TRAVELLING OR TRANS-FERRING YOUR REGISTRATIONTO ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATE (where fitted)The vehicle identification number plate is attachedas shown.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The number is stamped as shown.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

TYRE PLACARDThe cold tyre pressures are shown on the tyre plac-ard affixed to the driver’s side centre pillar.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is attached tothe underside of the bonnet as shown.

STI0374Z

STI0562Z

STI0494Z

STI0339Z


NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)IMMOBILIZER

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

STI0597 STI0609

With power back door button

STI0610

Without power back door button

RADIO APPROVAL NUMBER ANDINFORMATION


NOTE


10 Index

A

Air cleaner filter ................................................................... 8-12Air conditioner– Air conditioner specification label ..................................... 9-6– Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant ................ 9-3– Automatic air conditioner ............................................... 4-22– Heater and air conditioner .............................................. 4-20– Servicing air conditioner ................................................ 4-24AM-FM radio with Compact Disc (CD) changer ................... 4-30Antenna .............................................................................. 4-29Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .......................................... 5-22Armrest ................................................................................. 1-7Ashtrays and cigarette lighter .............................................. 2-29Audible reminders ............................................................... 2-10Audio– Audio control steering switch ......................................... 4-40– Audio system ................................................................. 4-25– Operation precautions ................................................... 4-25Automatic– Automatic air conditioner ............................................... 4-22– Automatic drive positioner .............................................. 3-25– Automatic sunroof and sunshade ................................... 2-27Aux– Aux settings ................................................................... 4-41– Auxiliary sockets ............................................................ 4-41

B

Back door ........................................................................... 3-17– Auto closure .................................................................. 3-20– Back door release lever ................................................. 3-20– Operating manual back door .......................................... 3-18– Operating power back door ........................................... 3-18Battery ....................................................................... 5-24, 8-14– Battery saver system ................................... 2-19, 2-36, 3-10– DVD remote controller and headphone battery ............... 4-44– Intelligent Key battery .................................................... 8-16– Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................................... 5-8– Vehicle battery ............................................................... 8-15Before operating DVD entertainment system ........................ 4-45Before starting engine ........................................................... 5-2Bonnet ................................................................................ 3-17Brake– Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................................... 5-22– Brake assist .................................................................. 5-22– Brake booster ............................................................... 8-10– Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-10– Brake precautions ......................................................... 5-22– Brake system ................................................................ 5-22– Brakes ............................................................................ 8-9– Checking footbrake pedal .............................................. 8-10– Checking parking brake pedal ......................................... 8-9– Parking brake ....................................................... 3-24, 5-25– Trailer brakes ................................................................ 5-20

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ......................... 9-2Car phone and CB radio ..................................................... 4-50Care and maintenance ........................................................ 4-49Care when driving ................................................................. 5-5CENTER mark on seat belts ................................................ 1-10Centre multi-function control panel ........................................ 4-2Checking– Checking bulbs ............................................................... 2-5– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-6– Checking footbrake pedal .............................................. 8-10– Checking parking brake pedal ......................................... 8-9Child restraints .................................................................... 1-14Child safety ........................................................................... 1-9Child safety rear door locks ................................................... 3-5Cleaning– Aluminium alloy wheels .................................................... 7-3– Chrome parts .................................................................. 7-3– Cleaning exterior ............................................................. 7-2– Cleaning interior .............................................................. 7-3– Glass ....................................................................... 7-3, 7-4– Removing spots ............................................................... 7-2– Seat belts ........................................................................ 7-4– Underbody ...................................................................... 7-3– Wheels ............................................................................ 7-3Coat hooks ......................................................................... 2-32Cockpit ................................................................................. 0-6Cold weather driving ........................................................... 5-24Compact disc– FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) changer .............. 4-37Console box ........................................................................ 2-30Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ............................ 5-8– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............. 8-11– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position

indicator .......................................................................... 2-4

Coolant– Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-5– Engine coolant ............................................................... 5-24– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3– Engine cooling system ..................................................... 8-5Corrosion– Corrosion protection .............................................. 5-25, 7-4– Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion ........ 7-4– To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............................. 7-5Coupling device installation ................................................. 5-21Cruise control ..................................................................... 5-17– Cruise control operations .............................................. 5-17Cup holders ........................................................................ 2-31

D

Defogger switch .................................................................. 2-23Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) system components ................. 4-42Dimensions ........................................................................... 9-5Door locks ............................................................................ 3-4Dot matrix liquid crystal display ............................................ 2-11Drive belts ............................................................................. 8-9Driving– Care when driving ........................................................... 5-5– Cold weather driving ..................................................... 5-24– Driving in wet conditions .................................................. 5-5– Driving in winter conditions .............................................. 5-5– Driving safety precautions ................................................ 5-4– Driving vehicle ................................................................. 5-9– Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .... 5-9– On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ................. 5-4– Precautions when starting and driving .............................. 5-2DVD remote controller and headphone battery ..................... 4-44

10-2 Index

E

Electric steering wheel adjustment ....................................... 3-22Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system ...................... 5-15– Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF switch ......... 5-16Engine ................................................................................... 9-4– Before starting engine ..................................................... 5-2– Changing engine coolant ................................................. 8-5– Changing engine oil and oil filter ...................................... 8-6– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-6– Engine cold start period ................................................... 5-5– Engine compartment ...................................................... 0-11– Engine coolant ............................................................... 5-24– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3– Engine cooling system ..................................................... 8-5– Engine oil ........................................................................ 8-6– Engine overheat ............................................................... 6-8– Engine serial number ....................................................... 9-6– Starting engine ................................................................ 5-9Entry/exit function (Automatic drive positioner) ..................... 3-25Exhaust gas ........................................................................... 5-2Exterior– Exterior front .................................................................... 0-3– Exterior rear ..................................................................... 0-4Exterior lights ...................................................................... 8-19

F

Flat tyre ................................................................................. 6-2Floor mats ............................................................................. 7-4Fluid– Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-10– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............. 8-11– Power steering fluid ....................................................... 8-11– Window washer fluid ..................................................... 8-14

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) changer .................... 4-37Fog light switch ................................................................... 2-20Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ..................................................... 5-13– 4WD warning light ......................................................... 5-14– Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) lock switch operations ............ 5-13Front– Front fog lights .............................................................. 2-20– Front seats ...................................................................... 1-2– Front-side view monitor ................................................. 4-17Fuel– Fuel filler cap ................................................................. 3-21– Fuel filler lid ................................................................... 3-21– Fuel gauge ...................................................................... 2-3– Fuel recommendation ...................................................... 9-3– Opening fuel filler lid ...................................................... 3-21Fuses .................................................................................. 8-17– Engine compartment ...................................................... 8-17– Passenger compartment ................................................ 8-18

G

Gauge– Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-3– Fuel gauge ...................................................................... 2-3– Meters and gauges .......................................................... 2-2Glove box ............................................................................ 2-30

H

Hazard indicator and horn operation .................................... 3-13Hazard indicator flasher switch ............................................ 2-24Head restraints ...................................................................... 1-6Headlight– Headlight aiming control ................................................ 2-20– Headlight and turn signal switch .................................... 2-18

Index 10-3

– Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-18– Headlights ..................................................................... 8-18– Xenon headlights ........................................................... 2-18Heater and air conditioner ................................................... 4-20Horn ................................................................................... 2-24How to adjust screen .......................................................... 4-19How to read the screen ......................................................... 4-4How to use brightness control and display ON/OFF button ... 4-5How to use DISP button ........................................................ 4-5How to use INFO button ....................................................... 4-5How to use multi-function controller ....................................... 4-3How to use PHONE button ................................................... 4-5How to use SETTING button ................................................. 4-8How to use STATUS button .................................................. 4-5

I

Ignition switch positions ........................................................ 5-7Indicator lights ....................................................................... 2-8Indicators for operation (Dot matrix liquid crystal display) ..... 2-12Injured persons ................................................................... 1-10Installation of child restraint system ...................................... 1-17Instrument brightness control ................................................ 2-4Instrument panel .................................................................... 0-8Intelligent Key system ..................................................... 3-6, 5-6– Intelligent Key .................................................................. 3-2– Intelligent Key approval numbers ..................................... 9-7– Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................................... 5-8– Intelligent Key battery replacement ................................. 8-16– Intelligent Key operating range ......................................... 3-7– Troubleshooting guide ................................................... 3-11Interior lights .............................................................. 2-35, 8-19– Interior light control switch ............................................. 2-35

J

Jump starting ......................................................................... 6-6

K

Key– Intelligent Key .................................................................. 3-2– Intelligent Key battery .................................................... 8-16– Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................................... 5-8– Intelligent Key operating range ......................................... 3-7– Intelligent Key system ............................................... 3-6, 5-6– Keys ................................................................................ 3-2– Locking with key .............................................................. 3-4– Mechanical key ................................................................ 3-3– Using Intelligent Key system ............................................ 3-7– Using remote keyless entry system ................................ 3-12

L

Light– 4WD warning light ......................................................... 5-14– Exterior lights ................................................................. 8-19– Fog light switch ............................................................. 2-20– Front fog lights .............................................................. 2-20– Headlight aiming control ................................................ 2-20– Headlight and turn signal switch .................................... 2-18– Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-18– Headlights ..................................................................... 8-18– Indicator lights ................................................................. 2-8– Interior light control switch ............................................. 2-35– Interior lights ........................................................ 2-35, 8-19– Light locations ............................................................... 8-20– Lights ............................................................................ 8-18– Luggage compartment light ........................................... 2-36

10-4 Index

– Map lights ..................................................................... 2-35– Rear fog light ................................................................. 2-20– Rear personal lights ....................................................... 2-35– Vanity mirror lights ......................................................... 2-36– Warning lights ................................................................. 2-5– Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ................ 2-5– Xenon headlights ........................................................... 2-18Lock– Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................................... 5-22– Child safety rear door locks ............................................. 3-5– Door locks ....................................................................... 3-4– Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) lock switch operations ............ 5-13– Locking with inside lock knob .......................................... 3-4– Locking with key .............................................................. 3-4– Locking with power door lock switch ............................... 3-5– Steering lock ................................................................... 5-7– Super Lock System ......................................................... 3-4Luggage– Floor box ....................................................................... 2-31– Loading luggage .............................................................. 5-5– Luggage compartment light ........................................... 2-36– Net ................................................................................ 2-33– Side box ........................................................................ 2-32

M

Maintenance– Care and maintenance ................................................... 4-49– Explanation of general maintenance items ........................ 8-2– General maintenance ....................................................... 8-2– Maintenance indicators .................................................. 2-14– Maintenance precautions ................................................. 8-4– Maintenance requirements ............................................... 8-2– Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 8-2– Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-14Manual steering wheel adjustment ....................................... 3-21Map lights ........................................................................... 2-35

Mechanical key ..................................................................... 3-3Memory storage function (Automatic drive positioner) .......... 3-25Meters and gauges ...................................................... 0-10, 2-2Mirror– Inside rearview mirror .................................................... 3-22– Mirrors .......................................................................... 3-22– Outside rearview mirrors ............................................... 3-23– Vanity mirror .................................................................. 3-24– Vanity mirror lights ......................................................... 2-36Mobile Entertainment System (MES) ................................... 4-42Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion .......... 7-4

N

NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) .............................. 3-16, 9-7

O

Oil– Changing engine oil and oil filter ...................................... 8-6– Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-6– Engine oil ........................................................................ 8-6On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ....................... 5-4Operating precautions (Trailer towing) ................................. 5-20Overheat (Engine) ................................................................. 6-8

P

Parking ............................................................................... 5-18– Checking parking brake pedal ......................................... 8-9– Parking brake ....................................................... 3-24, 5-25Passenger compartment layout .............................................. 0-5Playing Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) ..................................... 4-46

Index 10-5

Power– Locking with power door lock switch ............................... 3-5– Operating power back door ........................................... 3-18– Power outlet .................................................................. 2-28– Power steering fluid ....................................................... 8-11– Power steering system .................................................. 5-21– Power windows ............................................................. 2-25Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................................. 1-30Precautions– Audio operation precautions .......................................... 4-25– Brake precautions ......................................................... 5-22– Driving safety precautions ................................................ 5-4– Maintenance precautions ................................................. 8-4– On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ................. 5-4– Operating precautions ................................................... 5-20– Precautions on child restraints usage ............................. 1-14– Precautions on cruise control ......................................... 5-17– Precautions on push-button ignition switch operation ....... 5-6– Precautions on seat belt usage ........................................ 1-7– Precautions on Supplemental Restraint System ............. 1-23– Precautions when starting and driving .............................. 5-2– Safety precautions ........................................................... 4-2– Towing precautions ......................................................... 6-9Pregnant women ................................................................. 1-10Preparing tools ...................................................................... 6-3Protect environment .............................................................. 8-8Push starting ......................................................................... 6-8Push-button ignition switch .................................................... 5-6

R

Radio– AM-FM radio with Compact Disc (CD) changer ............. 4-30– Car phone and CB radio ............................................... 4-50– FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) changer .............. 4-37– Radio approval number and information ........................... 9-7

Rain-sensing auto wiper system ........................................... 2-22Rear– Rear and front-side view monitors .................................. 4-13– Rear fog light ................................................................. 2-20– Rear personal lights ....................................................... 2-35– Rear seats ....................................................................... 1-4– Rear view monitor .......................................................... 4-13– Rear window wiper and washer operation ...................... 2-23Repair and replacement procedure (SRS) ........................... 1-31Roof rack ............................................................................ 2-34Running-in schedule .............................................................. 5-2

S

Safety– Child safety ..................................................................... 1-9– Child safety rear door locks ............................................. 3-5– Driving safety precautions ................................................ 5-4– Safety chains (Trailer towing) ......................................... 5-20– Safety precautions ........................................................... 4-2Seat– CENTER mark on seat belts .......................................... 1-10– Front seats ...................................................................... 1-2– Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................................... 1-30– Precautions on seat belt usage ........................................ 1-7– Rear seats ....................................................................... 1-4– Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-14– Seat belts ................................................................. 1-7, 7-4– Seats .............................................................................. 1-2– Three-point type seat belts ............................................. 1-10– Universal child restraints for front seat and rear seats ..... 1-15Seat belt– CENTER mark on seat belts .......................................... 1-10– Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................................... 1-30– Precautions on seat belt usage ........................................ 1-7– Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-14

10-6 Index

– Seat belts ................................................................. 1-7, 7-4– Three-point type seat belts ............................................. 1-10Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System layout .. 0-2Security system ................................................................... 3-14Servicing air conditioner ...................................................... 4-24Snow chains ....................................................................... 8-26Spark plugs ........................................................................... 8-9– Iridium-tipped spark plugs ................................................ 8-9Special winter equipment .................................................... 5-24Speedometer and odometer .................................................. 2-2Start-up screen ..................................................................... 4-4Starting– Before starting engine ..................................................... 5-2– Jump starting ................................................................... 6-6– Precautions when starting and driving .............................. 5-2– Push starting ................................................................... 6-8– Starting engine ................................................................ 5-9Steering– Audio control steering switch ......................................... 4-40– Electric steering wheel adjustment ................................. 3-22– Manual steering wheel adjustment ................................. 3-21– Power steering fluid ....................................................... 8-11– Power steering system .................................................. 5-21– Steering lock ................................................................... 5-7– Steering wheel .............................................................. 3-21Stopping vehicle .................................................................... 6-2Storage ............................................................................... 2-30Storage box ........................................................................ 2-31Sun visors ........................................................................... 2-34Sunglasses holder ............................................................... 2-30Sunroof ............................................................................... 2-27Super Lock System ............................................................... 3-4Supplemental air bag systems ............................................. 1-29Supplemental Restraint System ........................................... 1-23Switch– Audio control steering switch ......................................... 4-40

– Defogger switch ............................................................ 2-23– Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system ................ 5-15– Fog light switch ............................................................. 2-20– Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) lock switch operations ............ 5-13– Hazard indicator flasher switch ...................................... 2-24– Headlight and turn signal switch .................................... 2-18– Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-18– Ignition switch positions ................................................... 5-7– Interior light control switch ............................................. 2-35– Locking with power door lock switch ............................... 3-5– Precautions on push-button ignition switch operation ....... 5-6– Push-button ignition switch .............................................. 5-6– Switching the monitor between rear and front-side view . 4-19– Turn signal switch .......................................................... 2-20– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ......................... 5-15– Windscreen wiper and washer switch ............................ 2-21– Wiper and washer switch .............................................. 2-21System operation (Automatic drive positioner) ..................... 3-26

T

Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-2Theft warning system .......................................................... 3-14Three-point type seat belts .................................................. 1-10Three-way catalyst ................................................................. 5-3Tonneau cover .................................................................... 2-33Towing– Towing precautions ......................................................... 6-9– Towing recommended by NISSAN .................................. 6-9– Towing your vehicle ......................................................... 6-9– Trailer towing ................................................................ 5-20– Trailer towing brakes ..................................................... 5-20– Trailer towing detection ................................................. 5-20Transmission– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ....................... 5-8– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............. 8-11

Index 10-7

– Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) positionindicator .......................................................................... 2-4

– Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .... 5-9Travelling or transferring your registration to another country .. 9-5Trip computer ...................................................................... 2-15Turn signal switch ............................................................... 2-20Tyre ...................................................................................... 9-4– Changing flat tyre ............................................................ 6-3– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-27– Flat tyre ........................................................................... 6-2– Spare tyre ..................................................................... 8-27– Types of tyres ................................................................ 8-25– Tyre age ........................................................................ 8-26– Tyre equipment .............................................................. 5-24– Tyre inflation pressure ................................................... 8-25– Tyre placard .................................................................... 9-6– Tyre pressure ................................................................ 5-20– Tyre rotation .................................................................. 8-26– Tyre wear and damage .................................................. 8-26– Wheels and tyres ................................................... 8-25, 9-4

U

Universal child restraints for front seat and rear seats .......... 1-15

V

Vanity mirror ........................................................................ 3-24Vanity mirror lights ............................................................... 2-36Variable voltage control system ............................................ 8-17Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ............................... 5-15– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch .................. 5-16Vehicle identification .............................................................. 9-5– Vehicle identification number ........................................... 9-6– Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .......................... 9-6

– Vehicle identification plate ................................................ 9-5Vehicle information and settings ............................................ 4-5Vehicle security ................................................................... 5-23Vents .................................................................................. 4-19Viscosity number (SAE) ......................................................... 9-3

W

Warning– 4WD warning light ......................................................... 5-14– Theft warning system ..................................................... 3-14– Warning lights ................................................................. 2-5– Warning signals ............................................................. 3-10– Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ................ 2-5Washing ............................................................................... 7-2Waxing .................................................................................. 7-2Wheel ................................................................................... 9-4– Aluminium alloy wheels .................................................... 7-3– Changing tyres and wheels ........................................... 8-27– Cleaning wheels .............................................................. 7-3– Snow chains ................................................................. 8-26– Wheel balance .............................................................. 8-27– Wheels and tyres ................................................... 8-25, 9-4Window washer fluid ........................................................... 8-14Windows ............................................................................. 2-25Windscreen wiper and washer switch ................................. 2-21Wiper– Rain-sensing auto wiper system ..................................... 2-22– Rear window wiper and washer operation ...................... 2-23– Windscreen wiper and washer switch ............................ 2-21– Windscreen wiper blades .............................................. 8-12– Wiper and washer switch .............................................. 2-21– Wiper blades ................................................................. 8-12

10-8 Index

X

Xenon headlights ................................................................. 2-18

Index 10-9

RECOMMENDED FUEL

Model with three-way catalystCAUTION

Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol willdamage the three-way catalyst.

VQ35DE engine models:

Use UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol with an octanerating of at least 95 (RON).

If unleaded premium petrol is not used, UNLEADEDREGULAR petrol with an octane rating of at least 91(RON) may be used at slightly reducedperformance. However, for maximum vehicle per-formance and the best driveability, the use of un-leaded premium petrol is recommended.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL*

VQ35DE engine modelsGenuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent to satisfythe following grade:

API grade SL or SM

ILSAC grade GF-3 or GF-4

ACEA A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5, C2 or C3

*: See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical information” section.

TYRE COLD PRESSURESee the tyre placard affixed to the driver’s side cen-tre pillar.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNNISSAN GREEN PROGRAM

Today, the efforts made by NISSAN to fulfil ourresponsibilities to protect and sustain the environ-ment are far-reaching. Within NISSAN, we promotethe highest levels of practice in every region and inevery area of operations.

COMPLIANCE AT EVERY STEPNISSAN focuses on ensuring that end of life vehiclecomponents are reused, recycled or recovered asthermal energy, and guarantees compliance with EUlegislation (the End of Life Vehicle Directive).

WE BUILD OUR VEHICLES WITHRECYCLING IN MINDReducing landfill waste, emissions, conserving natu-ral resources, and enhancing recycling activities areemphasised daily in our manufacturing, sales andservice operations and in the disposal of end of lifevehicles (ELV).

Design phaseTo reduce environmental impact we have developedyour NISSAN vehicle to be 95% recyclable. Wemark the components to facilitate dismantling, recy-cling and to reduce hazardous substances. Wecarefully verify and control substances of concern.We have already reduced to a minimum the cad-mium, mercury and lead in your NISSAN vehicle.NISSAN includes recycled material in your vehicleand looks for opportunities to increase the percent-age of recycled materials used.

Manufacturing phaseNISSAN plants based in the UK and Spain alreadyachieve a recycling rate of over 90% and are look-ing for further improvements. The UK plant installed8 windmills to cut carbon dioxide emissions at powerplants by more than 3,000 tonnes per year. Sincethe end of March 2007, NMISA (Spain) uses a solarpanel water heating system to save energy. This willgenerate 33% of the energy consumed in the bathsduring the painting of your vehicle.

Production and distribution phaseUsing resources efficiently to reduce the amount ofwaste generated during the production and distribu-tion stage. NISSAN promotes activities based onReducing, Reusing, and Recycling materials when-ever possible. The NISSAN GREEN PROGRAM2010 (NGP2010) is our midterm environmental ac-tion plan defining our goals for achieving a 100%recycling rate for operations in Japan and globally.

Use and service phaseNISSAN dealers are our window to you, our cus-tomer. In order to meet your expectations they pro-vide not only high quality services but are also envi-ronmentally responsible. NISSAN promotes activi-ties to recycle the waste generated as a result ofservice centre activities.

Disposal phaseRecycle your end of life vehicle or its components.When your NISSAN reaches the end of its life, andis no longer suitable for daily use, it still has value.

PETROL STATION INFORMATION ENVIRONMENT (End of LifeVehicles)

You can help prevent waste affecting the environ-ment by bringing your NISSAN to be recycled at ourcollection networks in your area. Our collection net-works guarantee no cost for the treatment of yourELV. For further information on how and where todispose of your ELV refer to your local NISSANdealer or consult: www.nissan.eu.

PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENTWHEN DRIVINGYour driving behaviour has significant impact on fueleconomy and the environment. Follow the tips be-low for better fuel-efficiency, better driving habits,and to be environmentally friendly by reducing emis-sions:

Defensive drivingAnticipating traffic conditions and acting accordinglyreduces fuel consumption, helping to protect of ournatural environment. Take your foot off the accelera-tor while approaching traffic lights and avoid lastminute braking when the light turns red.Avoid speeding, harsh acceleration, and strongbraking. The gain in time does not offset pollution ofthe environment. Try to maintain speed when drivinguphill to reduce fuel consumption and pollution.Maintain speed or allow the vehicle to go slowerwhere traffic allows.

Close windows when drivingDriving with a window open at 100 km/h (62 MPH)increases fuel consumption by up to 4%. Drivingwith the windows closed allows for better fueleconomy.

Use the roof rack only when necessaryOnly install the roof luggage system when you reallyneed it, otherwise put it inside the vehicle or store itin your garage. Do not drive around with an emptyroof rack, kayak holder, or ski rack, this will reduceyour aerodynamic drag significantly.

Optimise the use of air conditioningThe air conditioning system has a positive effect ondriving and vehicle safety through comfort coolingand dehumidifying, drivers are more alert and havebetter visibility when window demisting/defoggingbecomes necessary. However, use of the air condi-tioning system will increase fuel consumption sub-stantially in an urban environment. Optimise the useof air conditioning by using the vents as much aspossible.

Use the parking brake on slopesUse the parking brake when holding your vehicle ona slope. Avoid using the clutch (manual transmis-sion) or the accelerator (automatic transmission) tohold your vehicle as this leads to unnecessary fuelconsumption and wear.

Maintain a safe distanceAnticipate traffic conditions for a smoother drive andto assure comfort and safety during your trip. Driveand maintain a safe distance from other vehicleswhile in traffic. This will help reduce fuel consump-tion as you will not be constantly tapping yourbrakes.

Check your tyre pressureLow tyre pressure increases fuel consumption aswell as the use of non-recommended tyres. Correcttyre pressure will maximise the grip of your vehicleand optimise fuel consumption.

Have your car serviced regularlyRegular service allows you to run your vehicle inoptimal condition and with the best fuel efficiency.Have your vehicle serviced by your NISSAN dealeror a qualified workshop to ensure that it is main-tained to its original standard.

• In case of emergency ... 6-2

(Flat tyre, engine will not start, overheating,towing)

• How to start the engine ... 5-2

• How to read the meters and gauges ... 2-2

• Maintenance and do-it-yourself ... 8-2

• Technical information ... 9-2

QUICK REFERENCE

SECURITY INFORMATIONAs owner of this vehicle, important codes havebeen supplied that you may require in caseyou need to duplicate a NATS key.

Please fill in the allocated areas for the keycode or attach the sticker(s) if available. Forthe key number, see the “Keys” chapter in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion. Remove the page from this manual andkeep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.

When selling your vehicle, we kindly requestyou to hand over the page to the buyer.

SECURITY INFORMATION

Key number

Remove the page from the manual and keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.

When selling your vehicle, we kindly request you to hand over this page to the buyer.

nissan murano car bookthe nissan green program symbol indicates environmentally friendly information...

Documents